Mercedes-Benz 2004 E 500 Operator`s manual

E-Class Sedan Operator’s Manual
E 320
E 320 4MATIC
E 500
E 500 4MATIC
E 55 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your
desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to assist you with the operation
of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
as well as your and your passengers' safety, we ask you to make a small investment
of time:
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada......................... 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
At a glance .......................................... 19
Cockpit................................................. 20
Instrument cluster ................................ 22
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 24
Center console ..................................... 25
Upper part ...................................... 25
Lower part ...................................... 26
Overhead control panel ........................ 27
Door control panel................................ 28
Getting started ................................... 29
Unlocking ............................................. 30
Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 30
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 32
Adjusting .............................................. 34
Seats .............................................. 34
Steering wheel................................ 36
Mirrors............................................ 37
Driving.................................................. 40
Fastening the seat belts ................. 40
Starting the engine ......................... 43
Switching on headlamps................. 46
Turn signals and high beam ............ 47
Windshield wipers........................... 47
Problems while driving.................... 49
Parking and locking.............................. 51
Parking brake ................................. 51
Switching off headlamps................. 52
Turning off engine........................... 52
Contents
Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety...................................
Air bags .........................................
Seat belts .......................................
Children in the vehicle....................
Blocking of rear door window
operation........................................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving safety systems.........................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
ESP.................................................
The SBC brake system ...................
Four wheel electronic traction
system (4MATIC) with the ESP .......
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system..................
Tow-away alarm .............................
55
56
57
63
66
78
79
79
79
80
80
82
82
85
88
89
89
89
90
Controls in detail ............................... 93
Locking and unlocking ......................... 94
SmartKey ....................................... 94
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ........ 97
Opening the doors from the inside 103
Opening the trunk ........................ 103
Closing the trunk.......................... 105
Trunk lid opening/closing system* .....
105
Trunk lid emergency release ........ 110
Automatic central locking ............ 111
Locking and unlocking from
the inside ..................................... 111
Seats ................................................. 113
Easy-entry/exit feature* ............. 113
Removing and installing front
seat head restraints ..................... 114
Rear seat head restraints ............. 115
Multicontour seat*....................... 116
Drive-Dynamic seat* ................... 117
Seat heating*............................... 118
Seat ventilation* .......................... 119
Memory function ...............................
Storing positions in memory ........
Recalling positions from memory.
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ...........................
Lighting .............................................
Exterior lamp switch ....................
Combination switch .....................
Hazard warning flasher ................
Interior lighting ............................
Door entry lamps .........................
Trunk lamp...................................
Instrument cluster .............................
Instrument cluster illumination ....
Coolant temperature gauge .........
Trip odometer ..............................
Tachometer..................................
Outside temperature indicator.....
121
122
122
123
124
124
127
128
128
130
130
131
131
132
132
133
133
Contents
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
Standard display menu ................
AUDIO menu ................................
NAV* menu..................................
Distronic* menu...........................
Malfunction memory menu ..........
Settings menu..............................
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL menu* ...................................
Automatic transmission.....................
One-touch gearshifting.................
Gear ranges .................................
Gear selector lever position .........
Steering wheel gearshift control
(Speedshift) E 55 AMG.................
Program mode selector switch.....
Accelerator position.....................
Manual shift program E 55 AMG ..
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ......................
134
134
135
137
139
139
141
141
142
143
158
159
162
163
164
165
166
168
168
169
171
Good visibility ..................................... 172
Rear view mirror ........................... 172
Windshield wipers......................... 173
Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 174
Sun visors ..................................... 174
Rear window sunshade* ............... 176
Roller sunblind* in the rear doors. 176
Rear window defroster.................. 177
Climate control................................... 178
Setting the temperature................ 182
Adjusting air distribution............... 182
Adjusting air volume ..................... 183
Defrosting ..................................... 183
Air recirculation mode .................. 184
Deactivating the climate control
system .......................................... 185
Air conditioning............................. 186
Residual heat and ventilation* ...... 186
Automatic climate control* ................ 188
Setting the temperature................ 192
Adjusting air distribution............... 193
Adjusting air volume ..................... 194
Maximum cooling MAX COOL ....... 194
Defrosting ..................................... 194
Air recirculation mode .................. 194
Charcoal filter ............................... 196
Deactivating the climate control
system .......................................... 197
Air conditioning ............................ 198
Residual heat and ventilation........ 198
Rear air conditioning..................... 199
Power windows .................................. 201
Opening and closing the windows 201
Synchronizing power windows...... 204
Sliding/pop-up roof* ......................... 205
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof...................... 205
Synchronizing the
sliding/pop-up roof...................... 208
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*......... 209
Opening and closing the roller
sunblinds ...................................... 209
Opening and closing the
panorama sliding/pop-up roof ..... 210
Synchronizing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof...................... 213
Solar panel*.................................. 214
Contents
Driving systems .................................
Cruise control...............................
Distronic*.....................................
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)* .........
Parktronic system*
(Parking assist).............................
Loading ..............................................
Roof rack*....................................
Ski sack*......................................
Split rear bench seat* ..................
Expanding the cargo area*...........
Loading instructions.....................
Cargo tie-down rings* ..................
Useful features ..................................
Storage compartments.................
Ashtrays .......................................
Cigarette lighter ...........................
12-V socket*................................
Heated steering wheel* ...............
Telephone*...................................
Tele Aid* ......................................
Garage door opener .....................
215
215
218
230
233
237
237
237
240
242
243
244
245
245
249
250
251
251
252
253
261
Operation .........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .........
Driving instructions............................
Drive sensibly – save fuel.............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes..........................................
Driving off ....................................
Parking.........................................
Tires .............................................
Hydroplaning................................
Tire traction..................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water.............................
Passenger compartment ..............
Driving abroad..............................
Control and operation of radio
transmitter ...................................
Catalytic converter.......................
Emission control ..........................
Coolant temperature....................
267
268
269
269
269
269
270
270
272
272
272
273
274
274
275
276
277
277
277
278
278
279
At the gas station ..............................
Refueling......................................
Check regularly and before
a long trip.....................................
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level................
Coolant level ................................
Battery .........................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*.........
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Life of tire ....................................
Direction of rotation.....................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Rotating wheels ...........................
Winter driving ....................................
Winter tires ..................................
Block heater* (Canada only) ........
Snow chains.................................
280
280
281
283
283
284
287
287
288
289
291
291
292
292
292
295
297
297
298
298
Contents
Maintenance......................................
Flexible Service System PLUS
(FSS PLUS)...................................
Clearing the service indicator ......
Service term exceeded ................
Calling up the service indicator....
Resetting the service indicator.....
Setting the date for special works
Calling up the service data
information ..................................
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........
299
299
300
300
300
300
302
303
304
304
Practical hints .................................. 311
What to do if … ................................... 312
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 312
Lamp in center console................. 319
Messages in the display................ 321
Where will I find ...? ............................ 356
First aid kit.................................... 356
Spare wheel .................................. 356
Luggage box ................................. 357
Vehicle tool kit.............................. 358
Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 359
Unlocking the vehicle.................... 359
Locking the vehicle ....................... 360
Changing batteries in the
SmartKey/ SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* ............................... 361
Fuel filler flap emergency release . 363
Manually unlocking the
transmission selector lever ........... 363
Opening/closing in an emergency..... 364
Sliding/pop-up roof* or
panorama sliding/pop-up roof* ... 364
Replacing bulbs.................................. 365
Bulbs............................................. 365
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 367
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 369
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 370
Removing wiper blades................. 370
Installing wiper blades .................. 371
Flat tire............................................... 372
Preparing the vehicle .................... 372
Mounting the spare wheel ............ 372
Batteries............................................. 379
Disconnecting the battery ............ 380
Removing the battery ................... 381
Charging and reinstalling
the battery .................................... 381
Reconnecting the battery ............. 381
Jump starting...................................... 382
Towing the vehicle.............................. 385
Installing towing eye bolt .............. 388
Fuses.................................................. 389
Fuse box in passenger
compartment ................................ 389
Contents
Technical data..................................
Spare parts service ............................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet......................
Identification labels............................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive .................
E 320/E 500 ...............................
E 55 AMG .....................................
Engine................................................
Rims and tires....................................
Same size tires.............................
Mixed size tires ............................
Spare wheel .................................
Electrical system................................
Main dimensions................................
Weights..............................................
391
392
393
393
394
395
395
395
396
398
399
401
402
403
404
405
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ..........
Capacities ....................................
Engine oils....................................
Engine oil additives ......................
Air conditioning refrigerant ..........
Brake fluid....................................
Premium unleaded gasoline .........
Fuel requirements ........................
Gasoline additives ........................
Coolants.......................................
Windshield and headlamp
washer system .............................
Consumer information .......................
Uniform tire quality grading .........
406
406
409
409
409
409
410
410
410
411
413
414
414
Technical terms............................... 417
Index................................................. 423
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
receive comprehensive information, also
on permissible technical modifications,
and where proper installation will be performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
왔 Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
앫
New Car Limited Warranty
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only)
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws)
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your glove box.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
Always have the Service Booklet with you
when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
앫
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
In the USA:
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
13
Introduction
Where to find it
왔 Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. For easy
access, each section has its own reference
color:
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Operation
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
14
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Service Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄
Page
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
->
In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term
definitions.
DISPLAY
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
왔 Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
16
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage to and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden strong vibration or ride disturbance,
or you suspect that damage to your vehicle
has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down,
and drive with caution to an area which is a
safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
왔 Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
18
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
19
At a glance
Cockpit
왔 Cockpit
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
1 Parking brake pedal
2 Hood lock release
3 Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
Heated steering wheel*
4 Parking brake release
Page
45, 51
283
37
251
Item
8 Headlamp washer button*
Cruise control
222
앫
Distronic*
218
g Overhead control panel
22,
131
h Mobile phone/Glasses box
245
j Glove box lid release, glove
box lock
245
k Glove box
245
a Instrument cluster
Turn signals
47
앫
Windshield wipers
47
c Horn
앫
High beam
47
d Lever for voice control system*, see separate
operating instructions
7 Exterior lamp switch
31
앫
앫
28
e Starter switch
Page
f Front Parktronic* warning
indicator
b Multifunction steering
wheel
6 Door control panel
Item
174
9 Cruise control lever
45
5 Combination switch
Page
24,
135
l Center console
233
27
25
124
21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
Page
1 L Left turn signal indicator lamp
2 v Antilock Brake System (ABS)/Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP) warning lamp
313
앫
Status indicator with
malfunction warning
message
앫
146
Trip odometer
132
5 l Distance warning
lamp1
317
6 K Right turn signal indicator lamp
1
• Coolant temperature warning lamp
316
1 Supplemental
restraint system
indicator lamp
318
- Antilock Brake System (ABS) malfunction indicator lamp
312
< Seat belt telltale
317
A High beam headlamp indicator
127
Selector lever position
앫
Program mode
148
314
3 Brake warning
lamp, Canada only
314
? Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
315
b Fuel display with:
317
c Reset button for:
앫
Resetting trip
odometer
132
앫
Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination
131
앫
Confirming new time
settings
148
43
168
Page
; Brake warning
lamp, except
Canada
A Fuel reserve warning lamp
9 Main odometer with:
앫
Item
a Clock with:
8 Tachometer with:
4 Multifunction display
with:
Basic display with outside temperature display
Page
7 Coolant temperature display with:
3 Speedometer
앫
Item
Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning lamp without
function. It illuminates with the ignition on. It should
go out when the engine is running.
23
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
왔 Multifunction steering wheel
Item
1 Multifunction display in
speedometer
Operating control system
2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume
æ up/to increase
ç down/to decrease
3 Telephone*: Press button
s to take a call
to dial a call
t to end a call
to reject an incoming call
24
Page
Item
134
4 Menu systems: Press button
135
è for next system
ÿ for previous system
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
Page
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part
Item
1 Climate control
Automatic climate control*
Page
178
8 Rear window sunshade*
188
9 Seat heating*, driver’s side
Seat ventilation*, driver’s
side
2 COMAND system, see separate operating instructions
3 Seat heating*, front passenger side
Seat ventilation*, front
passenger side
4 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) control switch
Item
118
a Hazard warning flasher
switch
119
b PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Page
84
118
119
128
73
84
5 Central locking switch
111
6 Opening/closing button
for storage tray or CD
changer*, see separate operating instructions
246
7 Rear seat head restraints
switch, folding down
115
25
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
1 Ashtray
2 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button
26
Page
249
33
3 Selector lever for automatic transmission
43,
165
4 Parking assist (Parktronic
system)* deactivation
switch
233
5 Adaptive damping system
(ADS)* switch
230
Item
Page
6 Vehicle level control
switch*
231
7 Thumbwheel for setting
distance for Distronic*
225
8 Distance warning function* on/off switch
226
9 Program mode selector for
automatic transmission
168
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Rear interior lighting
on/off
129
7 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
253
2 Automatic interior lighting
128
8 Rear view mirror
172
3 Front interior lighting
on/off
128
9 Reading lamps
128
a Garage door opener
261
4 Temperature sensor
b Tow-away alarm button
5 Right reading lamp on/off
128
c Ambient lighting
6 Sliding/pop-up roof* or
panorama sliding/pop-up
roof*
205,
209
d Interior lighting
e Left reading lamp on/off
90
152
129
27
At a glance
Door control panel
왔 Door control panel
Item
1 Door handle
2 Seat adjustment
3 Memory function (for storing seat, exterior mirror
and steering wheel settings)
4 Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
28
Page
103
35
121
38
5 Switches for opening/
closing front and rear side
windows, rear window
override switch
201
6 Remote trunk lid release
switch, Trunk lid opening/closing system*
105
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
29
Getting started
Unlocking
왔 Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Unlocking with the SmartKey
Press unlock button Πon the
SmartKey.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The SBC brake system is activated.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment.
왘
Get in the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 94).
SmartKey
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 79)
30
왘
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Starter switch
0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
!
If the SmartKey cannot be turned, the
battery may not be sufficiently
charged.
왘
Check the battery and charge it
if necessary (컄 page 381).
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 382).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch when the engine is
not in operation.
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
If you have the KEYLESS-GO function, your
vehicle checks whether the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is valid when you pull the
door handle. If your SmartKey is valid, the
doors will unlock, and you can open them.
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function.
i
To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the
vehicle, no further than approximately
3 feet (1 meter) away from the door.
왘
Pull the door handle.
The turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs on the doors move up.
The SBC brake system is activated.
If the SmartKey is inside the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on
the gear selector lever corresponds to
turning the SmartKey to the various starter
switch positions.
32
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Getting started
Unlocking
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress the brake pedal.
Position 1
왘
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (as with
SmartKey removed).
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once.
This supplies power to some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
앫
once again, the ignition (position 2)
is switched on.
앫
twice, the power supply is again
switched off.
Ignition (or position 2)
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice.
This supplies power to all electrical
consumers. All the lights in the instrument cluster come on.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is again switched off.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 97).
For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO”
(컄 page 44).
33
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts
provide the best restraint when the wearer
is in a nearly upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
34
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Warning!
Seats
Warning!
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 40).
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the
power seats can be operated when the respective door is open.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats. Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant or
toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
For additional information, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 66).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat cushion tilt
The seat adjustment switches are located
on the front doors.
왘
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 4.
Adjust a comfortable seating position
that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far to the rear as
possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
Backrest tilt
왘
i
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment
5 Backrest tilt
왘
Switch on ignition.
or
왘
Open the respective door.
When moving the seat, be sure there
are no items in the footwell or behind
the seats. Otherwise you could damage
the seats.
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 5 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
Seat height
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 2.
The memory function (컄 page 121) lets
you store the setting for the seat position together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint height
왘
Head restraint tilt
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 5.
Warning!
Steering wheel
Warning!
G
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the
steering wheel adjustment feature can be
operated when the driver’s door is open.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
36
Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.
왘
Push or pull on the lower edge of the
head restraint cushion.
More information on seats can be found in
the “Controls in detail” section
(컄 page 113).
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment
Adjusting steering column in or out
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is
located on the steering column (lower left).
왘
Move stalk forward or back in the direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
왘
Switch on ignition.
or
왘
Open the driver’s door.
Move stalk up or down in the direction
of arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and that all the displays (incl. malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible.
i
The memory function (컄 page 121) lets
you store the setting for the seat position together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
Warning!
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Interior rear view mirror
왘
For more information, see “Heated steering wheel*”(컄 page 251).
G
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 172).
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Exterior rear view mirror
Warning!
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.
1 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button
2 Adjustment button
3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
38
왘
왘
Press button 3 for the left mirror or
button 1 for the right mirror.
왘
Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left or right according to the setting desired.
Getting started
Adjusting
!
i
If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from
the front), reposition it by applying firm
pressure until it snaps into place. The
mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror
normally.
The memory function (컄 page 121) lets
you store the setting for the seat position together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
At low ambient temperatures, the mirrors will be heated automatically.
For more information, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 173).
39
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning!
G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
40
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 63).
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats.
Regardless of seating position, children
12 years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant or
toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
For additional information, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 66).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use
a seat belt for more than one person at a
time.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and security”
section (컄 page 63).
1 Retractor
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
41
Getting started
Driving
왘
Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.
왘
Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until
it clicks.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Belt outlet height adjustment
1 Release button
왘
Press release button 1 and move the
seat belt height adjuster upward or
downward.
42
Proper use of seat belts
앫
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm.
앫
Check your seat belt periodically during travel to make sure that it is properly positioned.
앫
Make sure that the seat belt is always
fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.
Warning!
G
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
앫
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time. When using a seat belt to secure
infant or toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine
Warning!
Automatic transmission
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open.
Starting with the SmartKey
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress the accelerator.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄 page 31).
i
You can also use the “touch-start”
function. Turn the SmartKey to
position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 164).
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
The selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 52).
43
Getting started
Driving
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
gear selector lever.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure. Do not depress accelerator.
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
왘
If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
Or:
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
왘
Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 43). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 382).
The selector lever lock is released.
왘
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button 1 once.
The engine starts automatically if the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the
vehicle.
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 53).
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
44
Getting started
Driving
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Parking brake
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.
왘
Release the parking brake by pulling on
handle 2.
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.
1 Parking brake pedal
2 Parking brake release handle
Driving
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
왘
Move selector lever to position D or R.
i
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
컄컄
45
Getting started
Driving
컄컄
!
If you hear a warning signal and a message appears in the multifunction display when driving off, you have
forgotten to release the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
After a cold start the automatic transmission engages at a higher revolution. This allows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
46
Warning!
G
Switching on headlamps
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Exterior lamp switch
More information on driving can be found
in the “Operation” section (컄 page 269).
!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘
Turn the switch to B.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 124).
Getting started
Driving
Turn signals and high beam
i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal flashes three times.
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
High beam
왘
Push the combination switch forward.
The high beam headlights are switched
on.
The high beam symbol A in the
tachometer comes on.
Combination switch
1 Turn signal, right
2 Turn signal, left
왘
Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K flashes in the instrument cluster.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 127).
Combination switch
1 Single wipe
2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lights in the instrument cluster
come on.
47
Getting started
Driving
Switching on windshield wipers
!
Single wipe
왘
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.
왘
Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
I
Intermittent wiping (interval dependent on wetness of windshield)
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
i
The intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield.
Wiping will not occur with a door open.
48
Press switch briefly in the direction of
arrow 1.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘
Push switch in the direction of
arrow 1 past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
Information on filling up the washer reservoir can be found in the “Operation” section (컄 page 289).
Getting started
Driving
!
앫
Remove blockage.
Problems while driving
If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
The engine runs erratically and misfires
앫
For safety reasons,
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position I,
앫
앫
turn off the engine by turning
the SmartKey to position 0 and
withdraw SmartKey from starter
switch
or
앫
turn off the engine by pressing
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button and open the driver’s
door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is in
position 0, same as with
SmartKey removed from starter
switch)
앫
set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
49
Getting started
Driving
The coolant temperature is above
248°F (120°C)
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘
왘
If no damage can be determined on the
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 287).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
50
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
major assemblies
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount:
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
G
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when
the SmartKey is removed.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Parking brake
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
1 Parking brake
2 Release handle
앫
Move the selector lever to position P.
왘
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
start-/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
leaving.
Step firmly on parking brake 1.
When the engine is running, the warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which
could result in an accident and/or serious
injury.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is
dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
Switching off headlamps
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 46).
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 124).
Turning off engine
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P.
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the road curb.
52
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off with the SmartKey
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
(컄 page 31) to position 0 and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 41).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
i
With the SmartKey removed and the
driver’s door open, a warning sounds
and the message Switch off lights
appears in the multifunction display if
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
왘
After exiting the vehicle press the lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄 page 30).
All turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move
down.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 94).
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Place the gear selector lever in P.
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button to shut off the engine.
With the driver's door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch
(컄 page 31).
컄컄
53
Getting started
Parking and locking
컄컄 왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 41).
!
If you hear a warning signal, you have
either
앫
forgotten to switch off the vehicle’s
exterior lamps before opening the
driver’s door,
or
앫
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
tried to turn off the engine while the
gear selector lever is not in P.
Turn off the lights or place the gear selector lever in P.
왘
After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button 1 on the door handle or on the
trunk lid.
All turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move
down.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 97).
1 Lock button on the door handle
54
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왔 Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
앫
Seat belts (컄 page 63)
앫
Child restraints (컄 page 75)
앫
Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH) (컄 page 77)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with
앫
Air bags (컄 page 57)
앫
Air bag control unit (with crash sensors)
앫
Emergency tensioning device (ETD) for
seat belts (컄 page 66)
56
Advanced air bag system components with
앫
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
(컄 page 73)
앫
Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 70)
As independent systems, their protective
functions work in conjunction with each
other.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 66).
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on and goes out no later than a
few seconds after the engine has been
started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
lit when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫
fails to go out after approximately four
seconds after the engine was started
앫
does not come on at all
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced air
bag system to accommodate a person with
disabilities, contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Air bags
Warning!
G
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), side impacts (side
impact air bags and head protection window
curtain air bags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain air bags). However, no
system available today can totally eliminate
injuries and fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
앫
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front air bag inflates.
If you sell your vehicle, it is extremely important that you make the buyer aware of this
safety information. Be sure to give the buyer
this Operator's Manual.
앫
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear their
respective seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and make sure that it is properly positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the air bag can be seriously injured by an air bag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
앫
58
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫
Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side impact air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the air bag be triggered. Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts
and use an appropriately sized infant or
toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact air bags there is a
possibility for a side impact air bag related
injury if occupants, especially children, are
not properly seated or restrained when next
to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its
job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side impact air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the side impact air bag be deployed.
(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and for children 12 years
old and under, use an appropriately
sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have the rear mounted side impact air bags deactivated, then
deactivation can be accomplished upon
your written request to do so at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional
cost.
i
Air bags are designed to deploy only in
certain frontal impacts (front air bags),
side impacts (side impact and head
protection window curtain air bags)
which exceed preset thresholds and in
certain rollovers (head protection window curtain air bags). Only during
these events will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for air bags to provide
their supplemental protection.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In case of other types of impacts and
impacts below air bag deployment
thresholds, air bags will not be deployed. The driver and passenger will
then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A
properly fastened seat belt is also
needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
It is important to your safety and that of
your passengers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure that the
vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
60
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and air
bag
Warning!
앫
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front air bag cover, door trim panels, or door frame
trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near
SRS components and wiring. Keep area
between air bags and occupants free
from objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
앫
Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries
when curtain air bag is deployed.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫
An air bag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the air bag
has inflated. Do not touch.
G
앫
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Air bags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that was activated must be replaced.
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
앫
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags,
there is the possibility of abrasions or
other more significant injuries resulting
from air bag deployment.
Warning!
G
Front air bags
Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the front side impact air bags. Contact your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
1 Driver air bag
2 Passenger air bag
Driver and passenger air bags are deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the side impact air
bags
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
The front air bags in this vehicle have
been designed to inflate in two stages.
This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation that are based on the
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as
assessed by the air bag control unit.
On the front passenger side, the front
air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger’s weight category as identified by the Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 70).
The lighter the front passenger side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second
stage inflation of the air bag.
62
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
Side impact air bags, window curtain
air bags
The passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if:
앫
the system, based on OCS weight sensor readings, senses that the front passenger seat is occupied
앫
the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
in the center console is not lit
(컄 page 73)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
1 Side impact air bags
2 Window curtain air bag
The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are deployed:
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front air bags
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In addition, the window curtain air bags 2
are deployed:
앫
in certain vehicle rollovers
The front passenger side impact air
bags 1 will only deploy:
앫
independently of the front air bags
The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are not deployed in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
Seat belts
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened before the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates and a warning
chime sounds for approximately six seconds when the engine is started.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
For more information, see “Fastening the
seat belts” (컄 page 40).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 66).
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
64
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Warning!
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
앫
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver air bag, passenger front air bag, side impact air
bags, head protection window curtain
air bags for side windows), ETD (seat
belt emergency tensioning device), and
front seat knee bolsters.
Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags
and ETD) and side (side impact and window curtain air bags and ETD) impacts
which exceed preset deployment
thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETD).
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.
앫
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys etc., as
these might cause injuries.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫
When using a seat belt to secure infant
or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases:
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level
앫
in certain vehicle rollovers
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see
1 indicator lamp (컄 page 56)
!
The ETDs for the front seats will only
activate if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate properly inserted
into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will
activate with or without the respective
seat belts fastened.
66
In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts. Belt force
limiters reduce the force exerted by the
seat belts on occupants during a crash.
Warning!
G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
seats reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use.
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Make sure that the infant or child is
properly secured all times while the vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and
information on choosing an appropriate
restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems
i
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages
(컄 page 75).
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
For information on LATCH-type child
seat mounts (컄 page 77).
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
!
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories
and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap/shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
top tether anchorage point and a child
restraint lower anchorage system that
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
!
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and
to infant or child restraints.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
and top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
68
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with advanced
air bag technology designed to turn off
the front passenger front air bag in your
vehicle when the OCS senses the weight
of a typical 12-month-old child or less
along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision
which could occur under some circumstances, even with advanced air bag
technology. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore
strongly recommend that you always
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the back seat.
앫
If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure that the PASS AIR BAG
OFF lamp is illuminated, indicating that
the front passenger air bag is deactivated. Should the light not illuminate or go
out while the restraint is installed,
please check installation. Periodically
check the indicator lamp while driving to
make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the
PASS AIR BAG OFF light goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
air bag may or may not be activated
(컄 page 71).
Warning!
G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the front passenger
front air bag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined
by weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat.
i
The system does not deactivate the
front passenger side impact air bag,
the window curtain air bag and the
emergency tensioning device.
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
nearly upright position with their back
against the seat backrest and feet on the
floor to be correctly classified. If the occupant's weight is transferred to another
object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on
armrests), the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
70
Furthermore, the occupant weight may appear to increase or decrease due to
objects hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
underneath the seat or stuffed between
seat and middle console or between seat
and door or due to objects applying pressure on the back of the seat. Always make
sure that the seat has clearance in all directions at all times.
i
If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion needs to be serviced in
any way, take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Both driver and the front passenger should
always use the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not
the front passenger is properly positioned.
Warning!
G
If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger
than a small individual is in the front passenger seat, have the front passenger re-position himself or herself in the seat until the
light goes out, or check whether objects are
caught under or around the seat.
More information about air bag display messages (컄 page 350).
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS classified
the front passenger seat occupant as being
up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front passenger seat is
sensed as being empty.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up
to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the
PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp will illuminate
when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the front passenger
front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being
heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint or as being a small individual
(such as a young teenager or a small adult),
the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp will illuminate
for approximately six seconds when the engine is started and then, depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat,
remain illuminated or go out. With the PASS
AIR BAG OFF lamp illuminated, the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated. With
the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp out, the front
passenger front air bag is activated.
If the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp is illuminated,
the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
someone larger than a small individual, the
PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp will illuminate for
approximately six seconds when the engine
is started and then go out, indicating that
the front passenger front air bag is activated.
앫
the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit
앫
front passenger's weight category as
identified by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS).
If the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp is not illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is
activated and will be deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the side impact air
bags.
If the front passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by:
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
and top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
72
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with advanced
air bag technology designed to turn off
the front passenger front air bag in your
vehicle when the system senses the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child or
less along with the weight of a standard
appropriate child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision
which could occur under some circumstances, even with advanced air bag
technology. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore
strongly recommend that you always
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the back seat.
앫
If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure that the PASS AIR BAG
OFF lamp is illuminated, indicating that
the front passenger air bag is deactivated. Should the light not illuminate or go
out while the restraint is installed,
please check installation. Periodically
check the indicator lamp while driving to
make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the
PASS AIR BAG OFF light goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
air bag may or may not be activated
(컄 page 71).
i
앫
Deployment of the driver front air bag
does not mean that the front passenger
front air bag also should have deployed.
The Occupant Classification System
(컄 page 70) may have determined:
앫
that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than
that of a typical 12-month-old child
seated in a standard child restraint
- both instances where the system
suppresses deployment of the passenger front air bag even though
the impact met the criteria and was
of sufficient severity to deploy the
driver front air bag.
that the seat was occupied by a
small individual (such as a young
teenager or a small adult) or a child
weighing more than the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint - instances
where the system may suppress deployment of the passenger front air
bag even though the impact met
the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air
bag.
The PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
located in the center console.
1 Indicator lamp
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 1
will be illuminated, except with the
SmartKey removed or in starter switch
position 0.
Warning!
G
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp are lit at
the same time, there is a malfunction in the
Occupant Classification System. The front
passenger front air bag will be deactivated
in this case.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
airbag system and OCS:
앫
앫
74
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not place more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg)
into the ruffled storage bag on the back
of the front passenger seat. Otherwise,
the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant weight category.
앫
Do not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat.
앫
Do not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats.
앫
Do not stuff objects such as books between the middle console and the front
passenger seat.
앫
Do not move the front passenger seat
backwards against stiff objects.
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫
Do not lean on the armrests or lift yourself from the seat by using the handle
over the door as this may cause the OCS
to be unable to correctly approximate
the occupant weight category.
앫
Only have the seat repaired or replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Self-test Occupant Classification System
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp 1 located in the center console illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly
sitting on the front passenger seat and the
system senses the occupant as being an
adult, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp will illuminate and go out after approximately six seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the front passenger seat as being
empty, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp will illuminate and not go out.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp should not illuminate,
the system is not functioning. You must see
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before
seating any child on the front passenger
seat.
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
왘
This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
Head restraint must be installed (if removable) and positioned such that the
top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and the top of
the seat back.
Not foldable rear seat backrest
Make sure the tether strap is not twisted.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 350).
Warning!
G
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the Occupant Classification System. The bottom of the child seat
must make full contact with the passenger
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child
seat could cause injuries to the child in case
of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child.
1 Cover
왘
Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring.
왘
Guide tether strap between head restraint and top of the seat back.
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
왘
Securely fasten the hook 2 to the anchorage ring 3.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
For safety, make sure the hook 2 has
attached to the ring 3 beyond the
safety catch, as illustrated.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is attached, the child restraint itself can be secured. Tighten the top tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Foldable rear seat backrest*
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
왘
Once the top tether anchorage hook is
attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured. Tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Securely fasten the hook 2 to the anchorage ring 3.
왘
Fold rear seat backrest slightly forward.
왘
Remove cover from anchorage ring.
i
왘
Guide tether strap between head restraint and top of the seat back.
For safety, make sure the hook 2 has
attached to the ring 3 beyond the
safety catch, as illustrated below.
왘
Head restraint must be positioned such
that the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and the top
of the seat back.
Make sure the tether strap is not twisted.
76
왘
Swing rear seat backrest to the rear until it engages.
왘
Check the rear seat backrest to be
locked in its upright position
(컄 page 328).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Child seat anchors - LATCH type
!
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the outer rear
seats) for the installation of a “LATCH”
child seat with the matching mounting fittings.
Make sure the seat belt for the center
seat can operate freely with a child
seat installed.
i
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
The anchors are located behind an upholstery blend.
1 Indicates the position of the anchors
2 Anchors
왘
Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Blocking of rear door window operation
Warning!
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchors 2.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to your child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
78
G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.
1 Override switch
2 Indicator lamp
왘
Press override switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The rear
door windows can no longer be operated using the switches located in the
rear doors.
!
Operation of the rear door windows
with the switches located on the door
control panel of the driver’s door is still
possible.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment can cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
For more information on power windows,
see the “Controls in detail” section
(컄 page 201).
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
2½ minutes.
Activating
왘
Press and hold button 1 for at least
one second.
Deactivating
왘
Press button 1 again.
or
왘
1 Â button
Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
79
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫
BAS (Brake Assist System)
앫
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
SBC (Sensotronic Brake Control)
앫
4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic
Traction System)
ABS
i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the
ESP, SBC and 4MATIC is only achieved
with winter tires (M+S tires), or snow
chains as required.
Warning!
G
The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
80
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Warning!
G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS, BAS, ESP, SBC and 4MATIC cannot
reduce this risk.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pressure.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The - malfunction warning lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.
Braking
If the ABS activates during braking, the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of the
SBC brake system, you will not feel any
pulsation in the brake pedal.
왘
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashes
whenever the ABS is activated which can
be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
왘
Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 313).
81
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. Apply
continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle's traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP is
engaged.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
82
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashing in the
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
Warning!
G
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
!
The ESP will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size (컄 page 398).
!
Vehicles without 4MATIC:
Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine and ignition must be
shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button* in position 0 or 1)
when:
앫
the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer
앫
the vehicle is being towed with the
front axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the
brake system.
For information on vehicles with
4MATIC, see “Four wheel electronic
traction system (4MATIC) with the
ESP” (컄 page 88).
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 313).
83
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP
Warning!
i
DISTRONIC* cannot be activated when
the ESP has been deactivated.
G
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in driving
maneuvers.
The switch is located on the center console.
앫
starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
in sand or gravel
!
Turn on the ESP immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.
84
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
even when the ESP is deactivated.
The ESP always operates when you are
braking, even when it has been deactivated.
!
To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have drive wheels spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
such as:
앫
If one or more drive wheels are spinning,
the ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes, regardless of the
speed.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
1 ESP off/on switch
왘
Press ESP switch 1 until the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP is deactivated.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
When the ABS/ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
Switching on the ESP
왘
Press ESP button 1.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in
the instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode.
!
The SBC brake system
Warning!
The SBC brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo assistance. You have
increased braking safety and improved
braking comfort.
Warning!
G
Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated
in the speedometer display, for example by
the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only)
warning lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 314). Also read and observe the messages in the instrument cluster display (컄 page 321).
G
The SBC brake system requires electrical
power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 314) and
warning messages in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 321) come on while driving. To
brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may
only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
컄컄
Turn on the ESP immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.
85
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
컄컄
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the
recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on
the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground is only permissible for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For
more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 385).
The SBC brake system is automatically activated when you:
앫
unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or the KEYLESS-GO*
앫
open the driver’s or passenger door
앫
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1
앫
in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, press
the start/stop button on gear selector
lever once
앫
depress the brake pedal
앫
release the parking brake
i
If the SBC brake system is activated as
the brake pedal is first depressed, you
may feel a reduced pedal resistance
and longer pedal travel than normal.
When releasing the pedal, you may also
feel the brake pedal pulsate and you
may hear a sound which is caused by
the activation of the SBC brake systempump. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Pedal travel
returns to normal when you release the
brake pedal and the sound soon ceases.
If you experience the above while driving and the red brake warning lamp
(컄 page 314) illuminates and/or warning messages appear in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 321), the brake system
is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions of the warning message(s) and
have the brake system checked immediately.
86
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
Have brake pad replacement and other work
on the SBC brake system carried out by
qualified technicians only. Contact an
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. The SBC brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system. High
pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its automatic self-test. In addition, the system is automatically activated
when the vehicle is unlocked by SmartKey,
when the driver or passenger door is
opened, when the starter switch is turned to
position 1, when the brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released. Failure to deactivate the system
prior to maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which
may result in injuries (contusions and acid
burns). Extended brake pistons may also
cause injury.
The SBC brake servo assistance switches
off automatically
앫
approximately two minutes after you
turned the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or removed the
SmartKey
앫
approximately two minutes after you
pressed the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button to turn off the engine or power
supply and opened the driver’s door
(with driver’s door open, the starter
switch is set to position 0, same as
SmartKey removed from starter
switch)
앫
approximately 20 seconds after you
locked the vehicle from outside
Warning!
Be very careful not to endanger other road
users when you apply the brakes.
앫
After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle. This
produces heat which serves to dry the
brake disks and help prevent corrosion.
앫
On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to
prevent the brakes from overheating
and to reduce brake wear.
앫
After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes faster.
앫
Only Mercedes-Benz approved components (e.g. brake pads) should be installed on your vehicle. Brake pads not
approved by Mercedes-Benz may impair the safety of your vehicle.
Note on driving with the SBC
앫
Following extended periods of only minor loads to your brake system, you
should occasionally apply the brakes
when traveling at high speeds. This improves the grip of the brake pads.
G
87
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Four wheel electronic traction system
(4MATIC) with the ESP
!
!
Do not tow with one axle raised.
Models with all-wheel-drive only.
Otherwise the transfer case can be
damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine and ignition must be
shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button* in position 0 or 1)
when the parking brake is being tested
on a brake test dynamometer.
The 4MATIC improves vehicle’s ability to
use available traction, e.g. during winter
operation in mountains under snowy
conditions, by applying power to all four
wheels.
Warning!
G
If you see the ESP warning lamp v flashing in the speedometer, proceed as follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible
앫
While driving, ease up on the accelerator
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
88
!
Performance testing must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer.
Otherwise the transfer case can be
damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Active braking action through ESP may
otherwise seriously damage the front
or rear axle brake system.
Operational tests with the engine
running can only be conducted on a
two-axle dynamometer.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Activating
i
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system* (컄 page 253) provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly
activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are available.
앫
With the SmartKey: Removing the
SmartKey from the starter switch activates the immobilizer.
Anti-theft alarm system
앫
With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the engine by means of the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button on the gear selector
lever activates the immobilizer.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
Deactivating
앫
앫
With the SmartKey: Inserting the
SmartKey in the starter switch deactivates the immobilizer.
With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the engine by means of the start/stop button
on the gear selector lever deactivates
the immobilizer.
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
앫
the hood.
The alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed within approximately ten seconds after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash three times to
indicate that the alarm system is activated.
The indicator lamp in the central locking
switch (컄 page 25) begins to flash after
arming the alarm system.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
89
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왘
i
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed:
앫
a door
앫
the trunk lid
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash
once to indicate that the alarm system is
deactivated.
Canceling the alarm
With the SmartKey
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
90
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is canceled.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Grasp the outside door handle.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button.
The alarm is canceled.
i
The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system* (컄 page 253), provided that the
Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated, and that necessary
cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
Tow-away alarm
Arming the tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed after about
30 seconds.
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms automatically.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming the tow-away alarm
왘
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on
a surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
The button is located on the overhead control panel.
Switch off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey.
i
왘
왘
Canceling tow-away alarm
To cancel the alarm:
With the SmartKey
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
when the ignition is switched on.
왘
Press button 1.
or
The indicator lamp in the button comes
on briefly.
왘
Exit and lock your vehicle with the
SmartKey or (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button at each
door handle.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Grasp the outside door handle.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
1 Tow-away alarm off button
91
92
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Climate control
Automatic climate control*
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왔 Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key. The locking
tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two SmartKeys are a different color to help
distinguish each key unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks
94
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for the trunk lid
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 79)
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
Factory setting
Global unlocking
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
to open a looked door from the inside, which
could result in an accident or serious injury.
왘
Press button Œ.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
앫
neither door nor trunk is opened
!
앫
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
electromagnetic radiation.
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
앫
the central locking switch is not activated
i
Global locking
You can also open and close the power
windows (컄 page 201) and
sliding/pop-up roof* (컄 page 205) or
panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
(컄 page 212) using the SmartKey.
왘
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘
Press button Πonce.
Global unlocking
Press button ‹.
All turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
왘
Press button Πtwice.
Global locking
왘
Press button ‹.
95
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Restoring to factory setting
왘
앫
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about six seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey, then the
batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
앫
Check the batteries in the
SmartKey (컄 page 97) and replace
them if necessary (컄 page 361).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors (컄 page 359).
앫
Have the vehicle batteries and their
connections checked.
96
Use the mechanical key to lock the
doors (컄 page 359).
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed (컄 page 105). The
turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
Unlocking and opening the trunk lid
You can unlock and open the trunk separately.
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
왘
Press button Š until trunk unlocks
and begins to open.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
system*: to stop the opening procedure, press button Š. The trunk lid
stops moving.
The trunk can also be opened from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (컄 page 110).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking the batteries
왘
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order.
!
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 361).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock
the vehicle accordingly.
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
왘
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘
If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Specially equipped vehicles come with two
SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with
remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a
different color to help distinguish each
SmartKey unit.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked every time you grasp a door
handle.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk lid
앫
the fuel filler flap
97
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
SmartKey
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for the trunk lid
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 79)
For more information on using the
SmartKey buttons, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 94).
98
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause serious personal
injury.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
i
You can also open and close the power
windows (컄 page 201) and
sliding/pop-up roof* (컄 page 205) or
panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
(컄 page 212) using the SmartKey.
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
앫
You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(컄 page 94).
앫
You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with the remote control).
앫
Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
앫
Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with:
앫
Electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
앫
Metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey must be located outside the
vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m)
of a door or the trunk.
앫
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
앫
앫
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.
앫
All the doors must be closed.
앫
The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.
If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you
can only turn it off again with this button, even if you have put the SmartKey
in the starter switch in the meantime.
앫
앫
This does not apply if, after starting, the
selector lever is still in position P and
then the SmartKey is inserted in the
starter switch. The SmartKey will then
have priority over the KEYLESS-GO
function and the vehicle’s electrical
system will operate according to the
position of the SmartKey in the starter
switch, even stopping the engine.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehicle and can no longer be recognized by
the system, the vehicle cannot be
locked or the engine started via the
KEYLESS-GO system.
앫
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle while the ignition is switched on (e.g. if passenger
exits the vehicle with the SmartKey),
the message Key not recognized! will
appear in the multifunction display.
Find the SmartKey or change its
present location immediately (e.g.
place it on the front passenger seat or
insert it in shirt pocket).
앫
Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, the message Key
recognized in vehicle! will appear in
the multifunction display.
99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors (컄 page 359).
앫
Have the vehicle batteries and their
connections checked.
앫
Use the mechanical key to lock the
doors (컄 page 359).
Grasp the door handle.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds if neither
door nor trunk is opened.
Global locking
왘
앫
Press lock button at door handle
(컄 page 54) or trunk lid (컄 page 102).
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey, then the
batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
앫
100
Check the batteries in the
SmartKey (컄 page 97) and replace
them if necessary (컄 page 361).
왘
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘
Press button Πonce.
Global unlocking
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the driver’s
door handle only the driver’s door and the
fuel filler flap unlocks.
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
왘
Press button Πtwice.
Global locking
왘
Press button ‹.
Restoring to factory setting
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about six seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
!
Unlocking and opening the trunk lid
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then the batteries in the
SmartKey are discharged, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is
drained.
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
앫
Check the batteries in the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
(컄 page 97) and replace them if
necessary (컄 page 361).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors (컄 page 359).
앫
Have the vehicle battery checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
The handle is located in the rear license
plate recess.
Use the mechanical key to lock the
doors (컄 page 359).
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
malfunctioning, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
system*: to stop the opening procedure, press button Š on the
SmartKey. The trunk lid stops moving.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed. The turn signals will
flash three times to confirm locking.
You can unlock and open the trunk lid separately.
왘
Pull on the handle
The trunk can also be opened from the inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (컄 page 110).
or
왘
Press and hold button Š until the
trunk lid unlocks and opens.
101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking the vehicle
Checking the batteries
왘
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order.
!
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
1 Lock button at trunk
Replace the batteries (컄 page 361).
왘
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Press the lock button 1.
or
왘
Press the lock button at the outside
door handle (컄 page 54).
or
왘
Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
system*, press the KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing switch in the trunk
(컄 page 109).
The vehicle locks. The turn signals flash
three times to confirm locking.
102
i
If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock
the vehicle accordingly.
Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
If you lose your SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, you should do the following:
왘
Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Report the loss immediately to your car
insurance company.
왘
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
Opening the trunk
i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the
SmartKey, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
Opening the trunk from the outside
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The handle is located above the rear license plate recess.
With the SmartKey
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘
Pull on door handle 2.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
앫
Press the Œ or ‹ button on
the SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO*
앫
Grasp the outside door handle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button.
왘
Pull on the handle.
The trunk opens.
103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
!
Opening the trunk from the inside
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary.
i
The vehicle is locked centrally
(컄 page 94).
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The switch is located on the driver’s door.
104
Pull remote trunk lid release switch 1
until the trunk begins to open.
The trunk lid opens. The indicator lamp
in the switch comes on and remains lit
until the trunk is closed.
!
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed (컄 page 97). The
turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
The trunk can also be opened using the
SmartKey (컄 page 96) or from its inside in
an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency
release” (컄 page 110).
왘
i
1 Remote trunk lid release switch with indicator lamp
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed (컄 page 105). The
turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
The trunk can also be opened using the
SmartKey (컄 page 96) or from its inside in
an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency
release” (컄 page 110).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
i
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
1 Handle
왘
Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
handle 1.
왘
Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
on it.
Warning!
Trunk lid opening/closing system*
You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary.
Opening from the inside
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The switch for opening and closing the
trunk is located on the driver’s door.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
recognized inside the vehicle or in the
trunk.
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
1 Remote trunk lid switch with indicator
lamp
105
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Pull remote trunk lid switch 1 until the
trunk begins to open.
The trunk lid opens automatically. The
indicator lamp in the switch comes on
and remains lit until the trunk is closed.
!
The trunk can also be opened using the
SmartKey (컄 page 96) or from its inside in
an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency
release” (컄 page 110).
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance. To stop
the opening procedure, press or pull
the remote trunk lid switch.
i
You can activate the limiting opening
height of trunk lid using the control system
(컄 page 155).
106
왘
Limiting opening height of trunk lid*
The trunk lid opening height can be limited
when transporting goods on a roof rack
(e.g. presence of an optional MB sport luggage container). When activated, the trunk
lid opens to approximately the height of
the roof edge.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed (컄 page 105). The
turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
Closing from the inside
Press the remote trunk lid switch
(컄 page 105) until the indicator lamp in
the switch goes out and the trunk lid is
closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘
Release the remote trunk lid switch.
Warning!
G
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
the door mounted switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure that no
one is in danger of being injured.
To interrupt the closing procedure, release
the door mounted remote trunk lid switch.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the outside
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)
The closing procedure can be stopped at
any time by:
앫
pressing the trunk lid closing switch
again
앫
pulling the remote control switch on
the driver’s door
앫
pressing the Š button on the
SmartKey when the SmartKey is not in
the starter switch
i
1 Trunk lid closing switch
왘
Press trunk lid closing switch 1 briefly.
The trunk lid closes.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk lid re-opens
slightly.
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure that no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the remote trunk lid switch (on the
driver’s door), the trunk lid closing
switch 1 or the Š button on the
SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey you, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
107
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the outside
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
The closing procedure can be stopped at
any time by:
1 Trunk lid closing switch
앫
pressing the trunk lid closing switch
again
앫
pulling the remote control switch on
the driver’s door
앫
pressing the Š button on the
SmartKey when the SmartKey is not in
the starter switch
왘
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘
Press trunk lid closing switch 1 briefly.
Warning!
The trunk lid closes.
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
recognized inside the vehicle or in the
trunk.
108
G
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure that no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the remote trunk lid switch (on the
driver’s door), the trunk lid closing
switch 1 or the Š button on the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
The closing procedure can be stopped at
any time by:
앫
pressing the trunk lid closing switch
again
앫
pulling the remote control switch on
the driver’s door
앫
1 KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch
pressing the Š button on the
SmartKey when the SmartKey is not in
the starter switch
You can close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle simultaneously.
i
왘
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘
Press switch 1 briefly.
The vehicle is locked and the trunk lid
closes automatically. The turn signals
flash three times to confirm locking.
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
recognized inside the vehicle or in the
trunk.
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure that no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the remote trunk lid switch (on the
driver’s door), the trunk lid closing
switch 1, the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO or the remote trunk lid
opening switch (located on the driver’s
door).
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
109
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
왘
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens.
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
i
The emergency release button unlocks
and opens the trunk while the vehicle is
standing or driving.
Trunk lid emergency release
The emergency release button does
not open the trunk lid, if the vehicle
battery is discharged or disconnected.
The emergency release button is located
on the inside of the trunk lid.
1 Emergency release button
110
Briefly press emergency release
button 1.
i
If the emergency release button is
pressed and the vehicle was centrally
locked from the outside using the
SmartKey, the exterior lamps will flash
and the alarm will sound as the trunk
lid opens.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
With the SmartKey
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Illumination of the emergency release button:
앫
Press the Œ or ‹ button on
the SmartKey.
앫
The button will flash for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.
With KEYLESS-GO*
앫
The button will flash for 60 minutes after closing the trunk.
앫
Grasp the outside door handle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk automatically lock
when the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
앫
is pushed or towed
앫
is on a test stand
Information on towing the vehicle can be
found in the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 385).
You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode using the control system
(컄 page 154).
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk from inside using the central locking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if
you want to lock the vehicle before starting
to drive.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
The switch is located in the center console.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking switch.
Central locking switch
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
111
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking
i
왘
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
Press upper half 1 of the central locking switch.
If both front doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
Unlocking
왘
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not
unlock using the central locking switch.
Press lower half 2 of the central locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch
The vehicle unlocks.
앫
while in the selective remote control mode, only the front door
opened from the inside is unlocked.
앫
while in the global remote control
mode, the vehicle is unlocked completely when a front door is opened
from the inside.
112
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 35).
Easy-entry/exit feature*
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards and
the driver’s seat moves to the rear.
This allows easier entry into and exit from
the vehicle when the driver’s door is
opened. However, the engine must be
turned off.
When the SmartKey is inserted in the starter switch or you have pressed the
KEYLESS-Go* start/stop button and the
driver’s door is closed, the steering wheel
and the driver’s seat return to their last set
positions.
G
You can activate the following functions:
Make sure that no one can become trapped
or injured by the moving steering wheel and
driver’s seat when the easy-entry / exit feature is activated, the driver’s door is being
opened and the engine is turned off or the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch.
Only the steering column is adjusted.
Warning!
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature*, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
앫
앫
Steering column:
Steering column and seat:
The steering column and the seat are
adjusted.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be
switched on or off in the convenience submenu of the control system (컄 page 155).
i
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:
앫
Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 28).
앫
Move steering column stalk
(컄 page 37).
앫
Press the memory switch
(컄 page 28).
113
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing front seat
head restraints
Information on head restraint adjustment
can be found in the “Getting started” section (컄 page 36).
Warning!
i
Installing front head restraints:
Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier
removal and installation of the head restraints.
왘
Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
about five seconds.
왘
Push the head restraint down until it
engages.
왘
Adjust head restraint to desired position (컄 page 36).
Front seat head restraints
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
114
Removing front head restraints
왘
Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
the head restraint is fully extended.
왘
Pull out head restraint.
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat head restraints
왘
Folding head restraints back with
switch in the center console
The rear seat head restraints can be folded
backward for increased visibility.
Placing head restraints upright
All the lights in the instrument cluster
come on.
!
The rear seat head restraints cannot be
adjusted.
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
왘
Press the symbol-side on rocker
switch 1 to release the head restraints.
The head restraints will fold backward.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
왘
Pull the head restraint forward until it
locks into position.
!
Make sure the head restraints engage
when placing them upright. Otherwise
their protective function cannot be assured.
1 Head restraint release switch
115
Controls in detail
Seats
Installing rear seat head restraints
Removing and installing rear seat head
restraints
Warning!
i
When installing the head restraints,
make sure that:
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
1 Release catch
Removing rear seat head restraints
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
왘
Fold the backrest forward
(컄 page 240).
왘
Fold back head restraint (컄 page 115).
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
왘
Press head restraint release catch 1
and pull the head restraints out of the
guides.
왘
116
Fold the backrest back to its original
position.
앫
you place the correct head restraint
on the middle seat. It is marked
with the letter “M” on the outside of
the metal bars.
앫
the head restraints engage fully.
Multicontour seat*
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the right
side of the seat after turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch to position 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
twice.
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat cushion depth
왘
Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg using
switch 1.
Drive-Dynamic seat*
The Drive-Dynamic seat automatically adjusts the lateral support provided by the
backrest to your driving style.
Backrest contour
왘
Adjust the contour of the backrest to
the desired position using æ or
ç.
1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Backrest side bolster adjustment
왘
Move the backrest support to the bottom by using button 2 or to the center
by using button 3.
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Backrest side bolsters
All lights in the instrument cluster
come on.
왘
Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 4.
1 Backrest center
2 Backrest bottom
3 Seat cushion depth
4 Activate drive dynamic function
5 Backrest side bolsters
6 Massage function
The drive-Dynamic seat electronically controls the air pressure in the air chambers of
the backrest side bolsters. This function
improves driving comfort and pleasure.
117
Controls in detail
Seats
Activating
i
Seat heating*
왘
When the engine is turned off, the last
cushion setting is retained in memory.
The cushion is automatically adjusted
to this setting when the engine is restarted.
Both switches for the front seats are located in the center console. The red indicator
lamps in the switch come on to show
which heating level you have selected.
Press button 4.
The indicator lamp in the button comes
on for five seconds and the following
display appears in the multi-function
display for about five seconds.
Massage function (PULSE)
The massage function can help prevent
muscle tension during long drives.
왘
i
You can adjust the characteristics of
the Drive-Dynamic seat using the control system (컄 page 157).
Deactivating
왘
Press button 4 again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.
118
Press button 6.
The indicator lamp in button 2 comes
on. The air cushions in the lumbar area
pulsate.
i
The massage function turns off automatically after approximately five minutes.
Level
off
No indicator lamps on
1
One indicator lamp on
2
Two indicator lamps on
The seat heater automatically
switches to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.
3
Three indicator lamps on
The seat heater automatically
switches to level 2 after approximately five minutes.
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching seat heating off
왘
Press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.
i
The seat heating will be automatically
switched off after approximately
20 minutes.
1 Seat heating switch
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All lights in the instrument cluster
come on.
Switching seat heating on
왘
Press button 1 repeatedly until the
desired heating level is set.
One or more red indicator lamps on the
switch show the selected heater level.
!
If one or more of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heater switches off automatically.
Seat ventilation*
The switch is located on the center console. Seat ventilation can be activated
manually with the ignition on, or by the
summer opening feature (컄 page 203).
The blue indicator lamps on the switch
show the ventilation level selected:
Level
3
Three indicator lamps lit
2
Two indicator lamps lit
1
One indicator lamp lit
off
No indicator lamp lit
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
119
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching seat ventilation on
왘
Press button 1 repeatedly until the
desired ventilation level is set.
Switching seat ventilation off
왘
Press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.
i
1 Seat ventilation switch
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All lights in the instrument cluster
come on.
The seat ventilation is automatically set
to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature (컄 page 203).
!
If one or all of the lamps flash on the
seat ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical
consumers being switched on. The seat
ventilation switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
120
Controls in detail
Memory function
왔 Memory function
!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to
ensure adequate control, reach and
comfort. The head restraint should also
be adjusted for proper height. See also
the section on air bags (컄 page 57) for
more information on proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the interior and
outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.
You can store up to three different settings
per SmartKey.
The following settings are saved for each
stored position:
앫
Driver’s seat and backrest position
앫
Steering wheel position
앫
Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
position
앫
Passenger side exterior rear view mirror position
앫
Front passenger seat position
Warning!
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
These SmartKey-dependent memory settings can be deactivated if desired
(컄 page 156).
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
121
Controls in detail
Memory function
The memory switch is located on the door.
M
Memory button
1, 2, 3
Stored positions
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on
or the respective door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.
Storing positions in memory
Recalling positions from memory
왘
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
exterior rear view mirrors to the desired position (컄 page 34).
왘
왘
Press memory button M.
왘
Release memory button and press
stored position button 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
All the settings are stored at the selected position.
On memory button, press and hold
stored position button 1, 2 or 3 until
the seat, steering wheel and exterior
rear view mirrors have fully moved to
the stored positions.
i
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored positions.
Warning!
G
Do not operate the power seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is in an
excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move backrest to an upright position.
122
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position
For easier parking you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position, see “Activating exterior rear view
mirror parking position” (컄 page 173).
i
You can store a parking position for the
passenger side exterior rear view mirror for each SmartKey using the memory button.
왘
Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 2 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
왘
Press memory button M.
왘
Within three seconds, press bottom of
adjustment button 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
1 Passenger side, exterior rear view mirror
2 Adjustment button
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
왘
Press button 1.
i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored,
you can move the mirror again.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
123
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
the “Getting started” section (컄 page 46).
i
Exterior lamp switch
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
If you remove the SmartKey and open
the driver’s door while the parking
lamps or low beam headlamps are
switched on, then
M Off
U Automatic headlamp mode
C Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only:
When engine is running, the low
beam is also switched on.
B Parking lamps plus low beam or
high beam headlamps (combination
switch pushed forward).
124
앫
a warning sounds
앫
$ appears in the multifunction
display
앫
the message Switch off lights!
appears in the multifunction display
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
Automatic headlamp mode
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, the
low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
To activate the daytime running lamp
mode, see “Setting daytime running
lamp mode (USA only)” (컄 page 151).
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.
Warning!
G
Manual headlamp mode
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch (컄 page 124).
앫
앫
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
times.
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated, the low beam headlamps will
not be switched off automatically.
125
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
Canada only
The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp
cannot be switched on manually with
exterior lamp switch in position U.
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B and pull
the exterior lamp switch to first or second stop (컄 page 126).
When you shift from a driving gear to
position N or P, the low beam switches off
(with a three-minute delay).
Daytime running lamp mode
왘
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions the parking
lamps will also switch on.
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system
section under “Setting locator lighting”
(컄 page 152) and “Setting night security illumination” (컄 page 153).
Switching on fog lamps
USA only
The high beam headlamps can also be activated when driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated and exterior
lamp switch in position M.
To activate the daytime running lamp
mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode” (컄 page 151).
i
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
(컄 page 124).
126
Locator lighting and night security illumination
Warning!
G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from
U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an accident.
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
Switching on front fog lamps
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be
used in conjunction with low beam
headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation.
왘
Make sure the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
왘
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
i
Switching on rear fog lamps
The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp
cannot be switched on manually with
exterior lamp switch in position U.
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B and pull
the exterior lamp switch to first or second stop (컄 page 124).
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch comes on.
왘
Make sure the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
왘
Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp switch comes on.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
Switching on high beams
왘
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B (컄 page 124).
왘
Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
The high beam indicator A on the
instrument cluster is illuminated
(컄 page 22).
127
Controls in detail
Lighting
High beam flasher
왘
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2.
Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
왘
Hazard warning flasher
Press the hazard warning flasher
switch.
All turn signals will flash.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the ignition switched on or off. It is
activated automatically when an air bag is
deployed.
i
With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set
for either left or right turn, only the respective left or right turn signals will
operate when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is in position 1 or 2.
The switch is located on the center console.
Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
왘
Press hazard warning flasher switch
again.
i
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
128
Interior lighting
If the hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, press switch 1
twice.
1 Switch for reading lamp, left
2 Switch for rear compartment lighting
3 Switch for automatic function
4 Switch for interior lighting in front
5 Switch for reading lamp, right
6 Ambient lighting
7 Interior lighting
8 Reading lamps
Controls in detail
Lighting
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
Deactivating automatic control
왘
The interior lighting remains switched
off, even when you
Activating automatic control
왘
Press the switch 3.
Interior lamps are switched on in darkness, when you
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
The interior lamps are switched off following an adjustable time delay (컄 page 154).
앫
centrally unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
Manual control
왘
왘
Press button 2.
The lights in the rear passenger compartment go on.
왘
Press button 1.
The left reading lamp goes on.
왘
Press button 1 again.
The left reading lamp goes out.
Switching right front reading lamp on
and off
왘
Press button 5.
The right reading lamp goes on.
Switching rear interior lights on and off
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after approximately five minutes when the
SmartKey is removed or in starter
switch position 0.
Press the switch 3.
Switching left front reading lamp on and
off
왘
Press button 5 again.
The right reading lamp goes out.
Press button 2 again.
The lights in the rear passenger compartment go out.
An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
129
Controls in detail
Lighting
Door entry lamps
The appropriate door entry lamp switches
on if a door is opened in darkness and if
the interior lighting is switched to the automatic function.
The entry lamp goes out automatically
when the door is closed.
i
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or remove the
SmartKey, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately five minutes.
Trunk lamp
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk lid
is opened.
If you leave the trunk open for an extended
period of time, the trunk lamp will switch
off automatically after approximately ten
minutes.
130
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (컄 page 22).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫
open a door
앫
turn on the ignition
앫
press the reset button (컄 page 22)
앫
switch on the exterior lamps
You can change the instrument cluster settings in the instrument cluster submenu of
the control system (컄 page 146).
Instrument cluster illumination
Use the reset button (컄 page 22) to adjust
the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster.
To brighten illumination
왘
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.
Turn the reset button in the instrument
cluster clockwise (컄 page 22).
To dim illumination
왘
Turn the reset button in the instrument
cluster counterclockwise (컄 page 22).
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
131
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning!
앫
앫
G
Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
132
i
Trip odometer
Excessive coolant temperature trigger
a warning in the multifunction display
(컄 page 316).
Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display (컄 page 134).
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
If it is not displayed, press the è or
ÿ repeatedly until the trip odometer appears.
왘
Press and hold the reset button on the
instrument cluster (컄 page 22) until
the trip odometer is reset.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
E 55 AMG
The tachometer of the E 55 AMG does not
have a red marking denoting excessive engine speed.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated at
an excessive engine speed.
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is displayed in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 22). For information on how to select the unit of the
displayed temperature, i.e. degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F), see
“Selecting temperature display mode”
(컄 page 146).
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
133
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in
position 1. The control system enables you
to:
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings.
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.
i
The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player) will appear in English,
regardless of the language selected.
134
Warning!
G
Multifunction display
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
1 Segment ring
2 Standard display
3 Trip odometer
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system
(컄 page 134) are controlled by the buttons
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
1 Multifunction display in the speedometer
Operating the control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume
æ up / to increase
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under Audio, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
ç down / to decrease
3 Telephone*
s to take a call
t to end a call
4 Menu systems
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display
135
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.
앫
앫
If you press button è or ÿ repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
136
In the Settings menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see
the “Settings menu” section (컄 page 144).
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in you vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Commands/submenus
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Menu 4
Menu 5
Menu 6
Menu 7
Menu 8
Standard display
AUDIO
NAV*
Distronic*
Malfunction
memory
Settings
Trip computer
Telephone
Digital speedometer
Select radio Activate
station
route guidance
Call up settings
Call up malfunc- Reset to factory Fuel consumption Load phone
tion messages
settings
statistics after
book
start
Call up FSS
PLUS
Operate CD
player
Instrument clus- Fuel consumption Search for
ter submenu
statistics since
name in
the last reset
phone book
Check tire pressure*
Time/Date sub- Call up range
menu
Check engine oil
level
Lighting submenu
Vehicle submenu
Convenience
submenu
Dynamic seat*
submenu
138
Controls in detail
Control system
i
Display digital speedometer
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
왘
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
Standard display menu
You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button k
or j.
Select radio station
Press button j twice.
왘
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
Turn on the radio. Refer to separate operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the display.
AUDIO menu
The functions in the Audio menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
display.
The following functions are available:
1 Waveband setting
2 Station frequency
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
왘
Function
Page
Select radio station
139
Call up digital speedometer
139
Select satellite radio station*
140
Call up FSS PLUS
299
Operate CD player
140
Check tire pressure*
293
Check engine oil level
285
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
139
Controls in detail
Control system
i
왘
You can only store new stations using
the corresponding feature on the radio,
see separate operating instructions.
Additional optional satellite radio
equipment and a subscription to satellite radio service provider are required
for satellite radio operation. At time of
printing, no date for the availability of
optional equipment required for satellite radio operation had been set. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for details and availability for
your vehicle.
The satellite radio is treated as a radio application.
Select SAT radio with the corresponding softkey in the radio menu.
For more information, refer to separate
COMAND operating instructions.
140
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the display.
Feature description is based on preliminary information available at time of
printing.
Select satellite radio station*
1 SAT mode and preset number
2 Setting for station selection using
memory
3 Channel name or number
왘
i
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found.
Operate the CD player
왘
Turn on the radio and select the CD
player. Refer to separate operating instructions.
1 Current CD (for CD changer*)
2 Current track
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i
To select a CD from the magazine,
press a number on the COMAND
system SmartKey pad located in the
center console.
Controls in detail
Control system
NAV* menu
Distronic* menu
The Nav menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
Use the Distronic menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system.
What information is shown in the display
depends on whether the Distronic system
is active or inactive.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the message Nav in the
display.
앫
If the navigation system is switched off,
the message Nav Off is shown in the
display.
앫
If the navigation system is switched on,
the message Nav Active is shown in
the display.
Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section of this manual (컄 page 218) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following two
pictures in the display.
Distronic deactivated
When Distronic is deactivated, you will see
the standard display in the display.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
141
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic activated
When Distronic is activated, Distronic
and the set speed are seen in the display.
1 Distronic activated
왘
Malfunction memory menu
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan
malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. What information is shown in the display depends on
whether malfunctions have actually occurred.
Warning!
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 321).
142
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the malfunction message
memory in the display.
No malfunction messages
If no malfunctions have occurred, the message in the display is:
No Malfunction
Malfunctions have occurred
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
the number of malfunctions in the display:
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the “Practical
hints” section for malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 321).
Should any malfunctions occur while driving, the number of malfunctions will reappear in the display when the SmartKey in
the starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
i
The message memory will be cleared
when you turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 1 or 2. You
will then only see high priority malfunctions. These are highlighted by red
background (컄 page 321).
Settings menu
In the Settings menu there are two functions:
앫
앫
왘
The function To reset: Press reset
button for 3 seconds, with which you
can reset all the settings to the original
factory settings.
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings menu is seen in the
display.
Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.
왘
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 22) for approximately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to confirm.
왘
Press the reset button again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
i
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time.
143
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu
왘
Press button k or j.
In the display you see the collection of
the submenus.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
with the æ button.
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
왘
Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
144
Resetting the functions of a submenu
For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
왘
Move to a function in the submenu.
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 22) in
the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to confirm.
왘
Press the reset button again.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME/DATE
LIGHTING
Select temperature display mode
Synchronizing the
time
Set daytime running Set automatic lock- Activate
lamp mode
ing
easy-entry/exit
(USA only)
feature
Set level for dynamic seat, driver
Select speedometer display mode
Set time (hours)
Set locator lighting Limiting opening
Set SmartKey-deheight of trunk lid* pendency
Set level for dynamic seat, passenger
Select language
Set time (minutes)
Ambient lighting
Select display (speed dis- Set date (month)
play or outside temperature) for status line
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off
Select display (speed dis- Set date (day)
play or outside temperature) for basic display
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Tire pressure unit display*
VEHICLE
CONVENIENCE
DYNAMIC SEAT*
Set parking position
for exterior rear
view mirror
Set date (year)
145
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting temperature display mode
Selecting speedometer display mode
Access the Instr. cluster submenu via
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. cluster submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings. The following
functions are available:
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Temp. indicator.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Display unit Speed-/odometer.
Function
Page
Select temperature display
mode
146
Select speedometer display
mode
146
Select language
147
Select display (speed display or 147
outside temperature) for status
display
Select display (speed display or 148
outside temperature) for basic
display
Tire pressure display*
146
148
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set the temperature unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or
degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set speedometer unit to km or miles.
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Language.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for status display
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Status line display.
Available languages:
앫
German
앫
English
앫
French
앫
Italian
앫
Spanish
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the status line to degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
miles.
i
You will see the status indicator when
you have called up a different display
from the standard display.
147
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for basic display
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Basic display.
Tire pressure display*
Time/Date submenu
Use this function to set the unit for the tire
pressure display.
Access the Time/Date submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date sub-
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Instr,
cluster submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Display unit Tire pressure.
Function
Page
Synchronizing the time
149
Set time (hours)
149
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Set time (minutes)
149
Set date (month)
150
Set date (day)
150
Set date (year)
150
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the display permanently shown in the multifunction display.
148
menu to change the time and date display
settings. The following functions are available:
왘
i
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired tire pressure unit.
Information on setting the time, refer to
separate COMAND instructions.
Controls in detail
Control system
Synchronizing the time
Set time (hours)
Set time (minutes)
This function can only be seen on vehicles
with COMAND and navigation module*.
This function can only be seen when time
synchronization is switched off.
This function can only be seen when time
synchronization is switched off.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Time sync. with head unit.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Clock, hours.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Clock, minutes.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired setting.
The selection marker is on the hour setting.
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set the hour.
왘
Press æ or ç to set the minutes.
왘
Confirm by pressing reset button.
왘
Confirm by pressing reset button.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
Set date (month)
Set date (day)
Set date (year)
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Set date month.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Set date day.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Set date year.
The selection marker is on the month
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set the month.
150
The selection marker is on the day setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set the day.
The selection marker is on the year setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set the year.
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
available:
Function
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Lighting submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Lamp circuit headlamp.
Page
Set daytime running lamp mode 151
(USA only)
Set locator lighting
152
Ambient light level
152
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off
153
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
With daytime running lamp mode selected and the exterior lamp switch at
position 0, the following lamps will
come on automatically when the engine is turned on:
앫
Parking lamps and low beam headlamps
앫
License plate lamps (in low ambient
light conditions)
i
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding
lamp(s) will switch on.
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 154
왘
Press æ or ç to select manual or
daytime running lamp (constant)
mode. This function is not available in
countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory.
For safety reasons, resetting the
Lighting submenu to factory settings
(컄 page 143) while driving will not reset the daytime running lamp mode.
In the display you will then see the message: Lighting - Cannot be completely reset to factory settings
while driving.
151
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting
During darkness, the following lamps will
come on when the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the locator lighting feature is activated and the vehicle is unlocked by SmartKey:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. It switches off automatically after a period of approximately
40 seconds.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Lighting submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Function Surround lighting.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
152
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired setting.
The locator lighting will be switched on
or off.
Ambient light level
Using this function, you can adjust the
brightness of the ambient lighting.
왘
Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Lighting
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the message Ambient
light Level in the display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the
brightness of the lighting. 1 represents
the darkest setting and 5 represents
the brightest setting.
The ambient light is switched off at setting 0.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination (Exterior lamps delayed shut-off)
Use the Headlamps delayed shut-off
function to set whether and for how long
you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after all doors are
closed. When the delayed shut-off feature
is activated and the exterior lamp switch is
in position U before the engine is turned
off, the following lamps will remain lit after
you remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch or, when using KEYLESS-GO*, open
the driver's door:
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Lighting submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Headlamps delayed shut-off.
왘
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
왘
Then turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 2 and back to 0.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period.
앫
Front fog lamps
You can select:
왘
왘
i
You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door.
If you do not open a door after removing the SmartKey, the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds.
You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature:
왘
앫
0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated.
앫
15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s, the delayed
shut-off feature is activated.
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever
(컄 page 33).
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U before turning the engine off.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether and for
how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
왘
왘
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on time period. You can select:
앫
0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated.
앫
5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s, the delayed
shut-off feature is activated.
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Lighting submenu.
Vehicle submenu
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Interior lamp delayed
shut-off.
Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to
make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available:
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Function
Page
Set automatic locking
154
Setting automatic locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Vehicle submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Automatic door lock.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Limiting opening height of trunk 155
lid*
왘
Press æ or ç to switch Automatic door lock on or off.
154
Controls in detail
Control system
Limiting opening height of trunk lid*
Convenience submenu
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the limiting opening height of trunk lid.
Access the Convenience submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Convenience submenu to change the settings for a number
of convenience features. The following
functions are available:
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Vehicle submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Opening limiter Trunk lid.
Function
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Set parking position for exterior 157
rear view mirror
Warning!
You must make sure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel and the driver’s seat when
the easy-entry/exit feature is in operation
and the driver’s door is being opened or the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
Page
Activate easy-entry/exit feature 155
Set SmartKey-dependency
156
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or personal injury.
Activating easy-entry/exit feature*
왘
Press æ or ç to switch Opening
limiter Trunk lid on or off.
G
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature. When
the feature is activated, the steering wheel
and driver’s seat will move back to facilitate exiting when you
After entering the vehicle, the steering
wheel and seat will move into the position
stored in memory when
앫
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
앫
the driver’s door is closed
앫
앫
open the driver’s door
you put the SmartKey in the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button*
However, the engine must be turned off.
155
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
왘
i
Setting SmartKey-dependency
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:
Use this function to set whether the memory settings for the seats, the steering
wheel, the mirrors and other settings of
the control system should be stored separately for each SmartKey (컄 page 94).
앫
Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 35).
앫
Move the steering column stalk
(컄 page 37).
왘
앫
Press the memory button
(컄 page 122).
The following settings are available for the
easy-entry/exit feature
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to
the Convenience submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Function Easy-entry feature.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press æ or ç to change the
easy-entry/exit setting.
off
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to
the Convenience submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Key-dependent.
The
easy-entry/exit
feature is deactivated
Steering col.
Only the steering
column is moved.
Steering col. +
seat
Both the steering
column and the
seat are moved.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
156
Press æ or ç to set
SmartKey-dependency to on or off.
Controls in detail
Control system
Adjusting the dynamic seat
Setting parking position for exterior rear
view mirror
Use the Mirror adjustment parking aid
function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is engaged. For
additional information, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 172).
왘
Move the selection marker to the
Convenience submenu using the æ
or ç button.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Mirror adjustment parking aid.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The function dynamic seat adjustment lets
you determine the way the seat adjusts
while driving.
왘
Press æ or ç to switch function
on or off.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Dynamic Seat submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Dyn. Multi-cont. Seat, driver
for the driver seat or
Dynamic seat* submenu
Access the Dynamic Seat submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Dynamic Seat
Dyn. Multi-cont. Seat, fr. pass.
submenu to change the settings for the dynamic seats. The following functions are
available:
Function
Page
Adjust driver seat
157
Adjust passenger seat
157
for the passenger seat.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to switch function
Level 1 or Level 2.
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics after 158
start
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
158
Call up range (distance to empty) 159
1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
Fuel consumption since last reset
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: After reset.
Fuel consumption statistics after start
왘
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display: After start.
158
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last reset
i
All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately
four hours after the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the display.
TEL menu*
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 22) until
the value is reset to 0.
Warning!
왘
Call up range (distance to empty)
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: Range:
In the display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank
level.
G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘
Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
왘
Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the Tel menu in the display.
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Which messages will appear in the display
field depends on whether your telephone is
switched on or off:
앫
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: PHONE OFF.
앫
If the telephone is on:
Answering a call
Ending a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the display you will then see the message:
왘
왘
Press button s.
You have answered the call. In the display you see the length of the call.
i
If you do not wish to accept a call,
press button t.
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.
160
You have ended the call. In the display
you will again see the standby message.
Dialing a number from the phone book
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the display is
empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY appears in the display.
Press button t.
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the Tel menu in the display.
왘
Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
Please wait.
When the message Please wait disappears, the phone book has been loaded.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the Tel menu in the display.
The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
왘
Press button s.
앫
i
If you press and hold j or k for
longer than one second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing t.
왘
If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.
Redialing
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
In the display you see the first number
in the redial memory.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
왘
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
Press button s.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
앫
If the connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the display.
161
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔 Automatic transmission
Information on driving with an automatic
transmission is found in the “Getting
started” section (컄 page 43).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its gear shift program.
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫
the gear selector lever position D with
gear ranges (컄 page 164)
앫
the selected shift program
(C/S) (컄 page 168)
(C/S/M) (E 55 AMG only)
(컄 page 169)
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 168)
i
앫
the vehicle speed
During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
The current gear selector lever position
and shift program (C/S) or (C/S/M) appear
in the multifunction display (컄 page 134).
An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate. The indicators
come on when you activate a switch (e.g.
unlocking the vehicle or opening a door)
and go out after approximately
15 minutes.
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
or
앫
162
Warning!
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by:
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears manually when the
gear selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄 page 164).
Warning!
G
i
Canceling gear range limit
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the gear selector lever is moved to
the D- direction, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.
왘
Upshifting
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
the multifunction display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D- direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
163
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in position D,
you can limit the transmission’s gear range
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
right (D+).
The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display. If you press on the
accelerator when the engine has reached
its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Effect
ï The transmission shifts through
sixth gear only (applies only to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission).
î The transmission shifts through
fifth gear only (applies only to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission).
é The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
è The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
164
Effect
ç The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving:
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
æ The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever position
Effect
ì Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
position P. With the SmartKey
removed, the gear selector lever
is locked in position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in position P
(컄 page 363).
í Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
Effect
ë Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to N
only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
165
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever
in N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 51).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hey or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
166
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
gear selector lever from position P, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Steering wheel gearshift control
(Speedshift) E 55 AMG
You can change the gears manually on the
steering wheel or by using the gear
selector lever (컄 page 163).
Allow engine to warm up under low load
use. Do not place full load on the engine
until the operating temperature has been
reached. Shift into reverse gear only when
the vehicle is stopped.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drive train which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
The steering wheel gearshift buttons are
located to the left and right of the steering
wheel.
1 Left button: downshift
2 Right button: upshift
Downshifting
Upshifting
왘
왘
Press button 1 on the left side of the
steering wheel.
Press button 2 on the right side of the
steering wheel.
The gear range is limited when you are not
driving in the manual program mode
(컄 page 164).
The gear range is extended when you are
not driving in the manual program mode
(컄 page 164).
When driving in the manual program mode
(컄 page 169), the transmission will shift
from the current gear to the next lower
gear (컄 page 170).
When driving in the manual program mode
(컄 page 169), the transmission will shift
from the current gear to the next higher
gear (컄 page 170).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
167
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Program mode selector switch
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
왘
Press program mode selector
switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
the desired shift program appears in
the multifunction display (컄 page 134).
Accelerator position
Select C for comfort driving:
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
앫
The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
More throttle
Later upshifting
앫
Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
왘
앫
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
1 Program mode selector switch
S Sport
For standard driving
C Comfort
For comfort driving
!
Never change the program mode when
the gear selector lever is out of
position P. This could result in a
change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.
168
앫
The power transmission ratio for
gear selector lever position R
changes depending on the program
mode selected (S or C).
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Manual shift program E 55 AMG
In the manual shift program mode you can
change the gears manually (컄 page 166)
on the steering wheel or by using the gear
selector lever (컄 page 163).
Program mode selector switch
Activating manual shift program
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
왘
The program mode switches to manual
program mode M. Automatic shifting is
switched off. The gear range is not
limited.
Allow engine to warm up under low load
use. Do not place full load on the engine
until the operating temperature has been
reached. Shift into reverse gear only when
the vehicle is stopped.
You can change the gears manually when
the gear selector lever is in position D. You
can upshift or downshift through the gears
in succession.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drive train which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Press program mode selector
switch 1 repeatedly until the M for
manual shift program appears in the
multifunction display.
1 Program mode selector switch
S Sport
For standard driving
C Comfort
For comfort driving
M Manual
For manual gear shifting
The current gear selector lever position
and the selected shift program (C/S/M) is
indicated in the multifunction display
(컄 page 134).
The selected shift program (C/S/M) is
indicated in the multifunction display
(컄 page 134).
169
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Downshifting
Upshifting
Kickdown
왘
왘
The kickdown can also be used for
maximum acceleration when driving in the
manual program mode.
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction
(컄 page 163).
or
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction
(컄 page 163).
왘
or
Press button 1 on the left side of the
steering wheel (컄 page 166).
The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
170
왘
Press button 2 on the right side of the
steering wheel (컄 page 166).
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear.
왘
Shift up once the desired speed has
been reached.
i
When driving at full throttle, the transmission shifts to the next higher gear
when maximum engine speed has been
reached.
When you brake or stop, the transmission shifts down to a gear from which
you can easily accelerate or take off.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Deactivating manual shift program
왘
Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until S or C appears
in the multifunction display.
or
왘
Restart the engine.
The transmission will go into the last
automatic shift program mode selected
(S or C).
Program mode M is not stored.
i
The last selected automatic program
mode (S or C) is switched on when the
engine is restarted in the automatic
program mode.
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear
can be activated.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Move gear selector lever to P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Wait at least ten seconds before
restarting.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Move gear selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
171
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers
(컄 page 47) and for setting the rear view
mirrors (컄 page 37) is found in the “Getting started” section.
Rear view mirror
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when:
앫
the ignition is switched on, and
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view mirror
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫
reverse gear is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
172
Warning!
G
The automatic antiglare function does not
react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the rear window sunshade is in raised position.
Glare can endanger you and others.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
Windshield wipers
Information on the windshield wipers is
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 47).
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
i
왘
Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄 page 123).
왘
Make sure the Mirror adjustment
parking aid function in the Convenience submenu of the control system
is switched to on (컄 page 157).
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
왘
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
왘
Press button 2 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
앫
왘
Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.
ten seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R
앫
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
immediately once your vehicle exceeds
a speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h)
앫
immediately when you press button 1
for driver’s side mirror.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front
door is opened.
A rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers depending on how wet
the windshield is.
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Set the wiper switch to position I
(컄 page 48).
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor.
173
Controls in detail
Good visibility
!
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.
Headlamp cleaning system*
Sun visors
The button is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
왘
1 Headlamp washer button
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
Information on filling up the washer reservoir can be found in the “Operation” section (컄 page 289).
174
G
Swing sun visors down when you experience glare.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
1 Sun visor
2 Mounting
왘
Swing sun visor 1 down when you experience glare.
1 Sun visor
2 Mirror cover
3 Mirror lamp
4 Vanity mirror
1 Mounting
2 Additional visor*
3 Sun visor
If sunlight enters through a side window:
왘
Make sure the sun visor is properly engaged in the mounting.
왘
Lift the mirror cover to access the mirror.
The sun visors are extendable.
Lamp 3 switches on.
왘
왘
Disengage sun visor from mounting 1.
왘
Pivot sun visor to the side.
Adjust the sun visors by pushing or
pulling in the direction of the arrows.
175
Controls in detail
Good visibility
i
If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun visor from
mounting 1 and pivot to the side.
Mirror lamp 3 will switch off.
Rear window sunshade*
The switch is located in the center console.
Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame.
Warning!
G
When operating the rear window sunshade,
be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the raising or lowering procedure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be immediately halted by briefly pressing
switch 1. To reverse direction of movement, press switch 1 again.
Warning!
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Press the switch briefly at 1 to raise
the sunshade.
왘
Press the switch briefly at 1 to lower
the sunshade.
176
Roller sunblind* in the rear doors
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
왘
Pull the roller sunblind out using the
hooks.
왘
Attach the hooks at the top.
!
Always guide the sunblind by hand. Do
not let it snap back, as the retractor
could be damaged.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside
temperature.
Activating
왘
Press button Fon the climate control panel (컄 page 177) or the automatic climate control panel (컄 page 180).
Deactivating
왘
!
Press button F again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Warning!
G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
177
Controls in detail
Climate control
왔 Climate control
178
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Climate control panel
i
1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
For draft-free ventilation, move the
sliders for the center vents 3 and 5
to the middle position.
2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
3 Left center air vent, adjustable
4 Center air vent, fixed
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right rear center air vent
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left rear center air vent
5 Right center air vent, adjustable
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
The storage compartment between the
front seats can be ventilated, if so
equipped (컄 page 247).
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for adding cold air
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for side air vent
9 Side defroster vent, fixed
Rear air vents
a Side air vent, adjustable
179
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Left-side temperature control
7 Residual heat/ventilation
(ACOFF)
2 Windshield defroster
8 AC cooling on/off
3 Increase air volume
9 Air distribution display
4 Air distribution
a Climate control on/off
5 Rear window defroster
b Air volume display
6 Right-side temperature control
c Decrease air volume
180
d Air recirculation
e Air distribution and air volume
(automatic, manual)
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate
the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may
cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary change the air flow
using the air distribution controls
(컄 page 180) to direct the air away from the
footwell air vents.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected
(컄 page 186).
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume
to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window.
181
Controls in detail
Climate control
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 1 and 6 to
separately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compartment.
You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C).
Decreasing
왘
Turn the temperature control 1 or 6
slightly to the left.
Adjusting air distribution
Turn the temperature control 1 or 6
slightly to the right.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.
182
Adjusting manually
Use air distribution control 4
(컄 page 180) to adjust the air distribution.
Symbol
Function
a
Directs air through the center,
side and rear passenger compartment air vents
Z
Directs air to the windows
X
Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
Y
Directs air to the footwells
Press air distribution rocker switch 4
(컄 page 180) until the display shows
the desired setting.
The indicator lamp on the U button
goes out and the current air distribution appears in the air distribution
display 9.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.
Increasing
왘
왘
Adjusting automatically
왘
Press the U button.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air distribution and volume is adjusted automatically.
Adjusting center air vents:
The thumbwheels for left 2 and right 6
center air vents are automatically positioned for optimum interior airflow. In this
position, center air vent 4 and adjustable
left and right center vents 3 and 5 are
fully opened.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Heating:
Only in manual mode is it possible to lower
the temperature in the headroom by regulating the cold-airflow using
thumbwheel 7 (컄 page 178).
Adjusting air volume
Adjusting manually
i
Five blower speeds are available.
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
왘
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 48).
왘
Press the U button.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Defrosting
Press to decrease or Q to increase air volume to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on the U button
goes out. The selected blower speed is
shown in the display.
Adjusting automatically
왘
Press the U button.
The indicator lamp on the U button
comes on. The air volume is adjusted
automatically.
Activating
왘
Press button P.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button P.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
183
Controls in detail
Climate control
Activating
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
왘
G
Press button O.
Warning!
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Never operate the windows and
sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening
or closing procedure.
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and sliding/pop-up
roof* or panorama sliding/pop-up
roof* will close.
In case the procedure causes potential danger:
Vehicles with sliding/pop-up roof: The procedure for the windows can be immediately
halted by pressing or pulling the respective
window switch. The procedure for the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately halted
by moving the switch for the sliding/pop-up
roof in any direction.
The closing of the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding the O button.
Vehicles with panorama sliding/pop-up
roof: The procedure for the windows and
panorama sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately halted by releasing the O button.
184
Controls in detail
Climate control
i
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside temperatures.
If you have turned off the air conditioning (컄 page 186) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
Deactivating
왘
Press button O.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫
앫
앫
after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)
after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C), the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
Deactivating the climate control system
Deactivating
왘
Press button M (컄 page 180).
Reactivating
왘
Press button M again (컄 page 180).
or
왘
Press any button on the climate control
panel (컄 page 180).
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and sliding/pop-up
roof* or panorama sliding/pop-up
roof* will return to their previous position.
185
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘
Press button ± (컄 page 180).
The indicator lamp on the button ±
comes on.
186
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press ± again (컄 page 180).
The indicator lamp on the button ±
goes out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Residual heat and ventilation*
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 or 1, or remove it from
the starter switch.
왘
Press button T (컄 page 180).
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.
Controls in detail
Climate control
i
Deactivating
How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting.
왘
Press button T (컄 page 180).
The indicator lamp on button T
goes out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
187
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
왔 Automatic climate control*
188
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
1 Automatic climate control panel
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
3 Left center air vent, adjustable
4 Air vent, fixed
5 Right center air vent, adjustable
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for adding cold air
1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for side air vent
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for side air vent
9 Side defroster vent, fixed
2 Side air vent, adjustable
a Side air vent, adjustable
2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
3 Air volume control for right rear
center air vent
4 Temperature rocker switch, right
5 Display
6 Temperature rocker switch, left
7 Air volume control for left rear center air vent
189
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
1 Air distribution, left
7 Air distribution, right
c Automatic climate control on/off
2 Defrosting
8 Air distribution and air volume, right
(automatic, manual)
d Decrease air volume
3 Temperature rocker switch, left
4 Display
9 Activated charcoal filter
5 Temperature rocker switch, right
a Rear air-conditioning remote control
6 Rear window defroster
190
b Increase air volume
e AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)
Residual heat/ventilation (REST)
f Air recirculation
g Air distribution and air volume, left
(automatic, manual)
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may
cause burn or frostbite to unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary change the air flow
using the air distribution controls
(컄 page 190) to direct the air away from the
footwell air vents.
The automatic climate control is a 4-zone
intelligent climate control system. Your vehicle interior is divided into 4 zones.
With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic climate control determines the relation
of the sun to the vehicle and automatically
adjusts the inside temperature for every individual zone.
You can set the temperature for each of
the 4 zones separately. These settings can
be assigned to a SmartKey and stored in
memory (컄 page 156).
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. It cools
the vehicle’s interior according to the angle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside temperature and the selected
temperature. You can operate the climate
control system in either the automatic or
manual mode.
191
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected
(컄 page 190).
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
192
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume
to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window.
Setting the temperature
Use temperature control 3 for the left
side or 5 for the right side to separately
adjust the air temperature on each side of
the passenger compartment. You should
raise or lower the temperature setting in
small increments, preferably starting
at 72°F (22°C).
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
Increasing
왘
Push top of temperature control rocker
switch 3 and/or 5.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution controls 1 and 7
(컄 page 180) to separately adjust the air
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
found on the controls:
Adjusting manually
왘
Turn air distribution controls on each
side of the passenger compartment to
the desired symbol.
The indicator lamp in the U button
goes out.
Decreasing
Symbol
Function
Adjusting automatically
왘
a
Directs air through the center,
side and rear passenger compartment air vents
왘
Push bottom of temperature control
rocker switch 3 and/or 5.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
The indicator lamp in the U button
illuminates. The air distribution is adjusted automatically.
Z
Directs air to the windows
X
Directs air into the entire vehicle interior
Windshield fogged on the outside
Y
Directs air to the footwells
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on.
왘
Press the left or right U button.
Heating:
Only in manual air distribution mode is it
possible to lower the temperature in the
headroom by adding outside air using
thumbwheel 7 (컄 page 188) in the dashboard.
Press left or right U button.
193
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
Adjusting air volume
Adjusting manually
Nine blower speeds are available.
왘
Press to decrease or Q to increase air volume to the desired level.
The AUTO display disappears and the
automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed is shown in the
display.
Adjusting automatically
왘
Maximum cooling MAX COOL
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, the display “MAX COOL” appears
in the front and rear display.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof* are closed).
Defrosting
Press left or right U button.
i
The air volume is adjusted automatically.
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
Activating
왘
Press button P.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
194
Deactivating
왘
Press button P.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
Activating
왘
Warning!
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Never operate the windows and
sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening
or closing procedure.
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof* or panorama sliding/pop-up
roof* will close.
i
G
Press button O.
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically:
In case the procedure causes potential danger:
Vehicles with sliding/pop-up roof: The procedure for the windows can be immediately
halted by pressing or pulling the respective
window switch. The procedure for the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately halted
by moving the switch for the sliding/pop-up
roof in any direction.
The closing of the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding the O button.
Vehicles with panorama sliding/pop-up
roof: The procedure for the windows and
panorama sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately halted by releasing the O button.
앫
at high outside temperatures
앫
if the concentration of carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases, for example in a
tunnel (charcoal filter activated
(컄 page 196))
If you have turned off the air conditioning (컄 page 186) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
Deactivating
왘
Press button O.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
195
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and the sliding / pop-up
roof* or panorama sliding / pop-up
roof* will return to their previous position.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫
after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)
앫
after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off (ACOFF)
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
196
Charcoal filter
Warning!
An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compartment.
Activating
왘
Press button e.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
i
If you keep button e pressed, the
side windows and the sliding / pop-up
roof* or panorama sliding / pop-up
roof* will close.
G
Never operate the side windows and
sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening
or closing procedure.
Vehicles with sliding/pop-up roof: The procedure for the windows can be immediately
halted by pressing or pulling the respective
window switch. The procedure for the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately halted
by moving the switch for the sliding/pop-up
roof in any direction.
The closing of the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding the e button.
Vehicles with panorama sliding/pop-up
roof: The procedure for the windows and
panorama sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately halted by releasing the e button.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
Deactivating
왘
Press button e.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i
If you keep button e pressed, the
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof* will return to their previous position.
The system switches automatically to the
air recirculation mode if the carbon
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)
concentration of the outside air increases
beyond a predetermined level.
The automatic air recirculation mode does
not function if ACOFF mode is selected or if
the outside temperature has fallen below
41° F (5° C).
The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on the
inside, or if the passenger compartment
needs to be quickly heated or cooled
down.
Deactivating the climate control system
Reactivating
왘
Press button M again.
i
With the climate control system deactivated, the air flow and circulation are
switched off.
Only choose this setting temporarily to
prevent the windows from fogging up.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the automatic
climate control system.
왘
Press button M until the display is
cleared.
The climate control system is deactivated.
197
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press ° again.
ACOFF in the display goes out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
Deactivating
!
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off.
왘
Press button °.
ACOFF in the display comes on.
198
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 or 1, or remove it from
the starter switch.
왘
Press button °.
REST in the display comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button °.
REST in the display goes out.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
The residual heat is automatically turned
off
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
Rear air conditioning
Display
i
How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting.
1 Temperature, left
2 Temperature, right
Basic settings
1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
right rear center air vent
4 Temperature rocker switch, right
5 Display
6 Temperature rocker switch, left
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
left rear center air vent
We recommend setting the temperature
on both the left- and right-hand sides to
72°F. This ensures a pleasant temperature
in the rear of the vehicle.
The temperatures for the left- and
right-hand sides can be set using temperature rocker switches 4 and 6.
199
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control*
i
The rear air conditioning will not cool
the air when ACOFF mode has been selected in the front control panel.
Adjusting the rear settings with the
front control panel
The temperature for the rear left- and
right-hand sides of the vehicle can be set
with temperature rocker switches 3
and 5.
The temperature display disappears approximately five seconds after the last
SmartKey confirmation and switches back
to the normal display.
i
The normal display will appear when
the ™ button is pressed again.
Display
왘
Press the ™ button (컄 page 190).
The display switches over.
200
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning!
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all of
the side windows are on the driver’s door.
The switches for the respective windows
are on the front passenger door and the
rear doors.
G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
1 Rear window override switch
(컄 page 78)
2 Right front window
3 Right rear window
4 Left rear window
5 Left front window
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle,
the automatic reversal function will not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i
You can also open or close the windows using the following:
앫
SmartKey (summer opening/convenience feature) (컄 page 203)
앫
Button O in the control panel of
the climate control (컄 page 180)
앫
Button e in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 190)
201
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice.
Closing the windows
왘
You can still operate the windows when
the key is in starter switch position 0 or
has been removed:
앫
until the driver’s or front passenger
door has been opened
앫
for no more than five minutes
Opening the windows
Press switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Warning
G
If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window, and upward movement of
the window is blocked by some obstruction
including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate.
Fully opening the windows
(Express-open)
왘
Press switch 2 to 5 past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window opens completely.
202
왘
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
i
왘
Pull switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
point.
Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
Pull switch 2 to 5 past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window closes completely.
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
window will stop and open slightly.
Warning!
G
Driver’s door only:
If within five seconds switch is again pulled
past the resistance point and released, the
automatic reversal will not operate.
Stopping windows
왘
Press or pull respective switch again.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows with
the SmartKey
The sliding/pop-up roof* (컄 page 206) or
panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
(컄 page 212) will also be opened or closed
when the power windows are operated
with the SmartKey.
Warning!
G
Opening (Summer opening feature)
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously:
앫
opening the sliding/pop-up roof
앫
opening the side windows
앫
turning on the seat ventilation* for the
driver’s seat
i
Never operate the windows or sliding/
pop-up roof or panorama sliding/pop-up
roof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the button on the
SmartKey. To reverse direction of movement, press Œ for opening or ‹ for
closing.
왘
Aim transmitter eye at the front door
handle.
The seat ventilation* for the driver’s
seat is automatically set to the highest
level if activated via summer opening
feature.
To do so, follow the instructions below:
왘
왘
Release the Πbutton to stop procedure.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
or panorama sliding/pop-up roof* begin to close after approximately one
second.
왘
Release the ‹ button to stop procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof or panorama sliding/pop-up roof* are properly closed before leaving the vehicle.
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
or panorama sliding/pop-up roof* begin to open after approximately one
second.
203
Controls in detail
Power windows
Closing the side windows with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Press and hold lock button at door
(컄 page 54) until the side windows and
the sliding / pop-up roof or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof* are closed.
Warning!
G
When closing the windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof*, be sure that there is
no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫
Release the lock button.
앫
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof* will open for as
long as the door handle is held but the
door not opened.
204
Synchronizing power windows
The power window must be resynchronized each time
앫
after the battery has been disconnected.
앫
if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close).
Synchronizing the power windows
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Pull the power window switches until
the side windows are closed.
Hold the switches for approximately
one second.
The power windows are synchronized.
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*
왔 Sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
and closed electrically. The switch for the
sliding/pop-up roof is on the overhead
control panel.
With the roof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
roof open, the screen will also retract.
Warning!
G
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make
sure that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up
roof can be immediately halted by releasing
the switch or, if the switch was moved past
the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.
1 Push back to slide roof open
2 Push forward to slide roof closed
3 Push up to raise roof at rear
4 Pull down to lower roof at rear
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the
sliding/pop-up roof.
Open the sliding/pop-up roof only if
the roof is clear of snow or ice.
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (컄 page 364).
i
You can also open or close the
sliding/pop-up roof using:
앫
SmartKey, (컄 page 206)
앫
Button O in the control panel of
the climate control (컄 page 180) or
automatic climate control
(컄 page 190)
앫
Button e in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 190)
205
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*
왘
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once
or twice.
Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the
sliding/pop-up roof
왘
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof
왘
To open, close, raise or lower the
sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch
to resistance point in the required
direction 1 to 4.
Release the switch when the roof has
reached the desired position.
To open, close, raise or lower the sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch past
the resistance point in the required
direction 1 to 4 and release.
The sliding/pop up roof opens or closes completely.
Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof
왘
Move the switch in any direction.
i
If the movement of the sliding/pop-up
roof is blocked during the closing procedure, the roof will stop and reopen
slightly.
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey
The power windows (컄 page 203) will also
be opened or closed when you operate the
sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey.
Warning!
Never operate the windows or
sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility
of anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the remote control button.
To reverse direction of movement,
press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
왘
206
G
Aim transmitter eye at the front door
handle.
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening (Summer opening feature)
Closing (Convenience feature)
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously:
왘
앫
opening the sliding/pop-up roof
앫
opening the side windows
앫
switching on the seat ventilation*
To do so, follow the instructions below:
왘
왘
Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to close after approximately
one second.
왘
Release the ‹ button to stop procedure.
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.
Make sure all side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed before
leaving the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to open after approximately
one second.
Closing the sliding/pop-up roof with
KEYLESS-GO*
Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.
The power windows (컄 page 204) will also
be closed when you operate the
sliding/pop-up roof with KEYLESS-GO.
왘
Warning!
G
When closing the windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
The sliding/pop-up roof will not automatically reopen if blocked during convenience
closing.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫
Release the lock button.
앫
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long
as the door handle is held but the door
not opened.
Press and hold lock button at door
(컄 page 54) until the side windows and
the sliding/pop-up roof are closed.
207
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof
The sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchronized each time
앫
after the battery has been disconnected
앫
the sliding/pop-up roof has been
closed manually (컄 page 364)
앫
the sliding/pop-up roof does not open
smoothly
앫
a malfunction
Synchronizing
왘
Remove the fuse from the main fuse
box (컄 page 389).
왘
Replace the fuse in the main fuse box.
왘
Switch on the ignition.
왘
Press and hold the switch in
direction 3 until the sliding/pop-up
roof is fully raised at the rear.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
The sliding/pop-up roof is synchronized.
208
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
왔 Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Warning!
G
When opening or closing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof, make sure that there is
no danger of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure.
If the panorama sliding/pop-up roof is
closed with the convenience closing feature
and becomes blocked, it will not open automatically. Should this occur, press the
Πbutton on the SmartKey and hold it
down; the panorama sliding/pop-up roof
opens again.
Opening and closing the roller
sunblinds
The roller sunblinds can only be opened or
closed when the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof is closed. The front
and rear roller sunblind cannot be operated individually.
Roller sunblinds switch, rear
1 Open
2 Close
왘
The panorama roof is made out of glass. In
the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury
for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them
may protrude from the passenger compartment.
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof switch
1 Open
2 Close
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
Opening and closing the roller sunblinds
왘
To open or close the roller sunblinds,
move the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof switch or the rear roller sunblind
switch to resistance point in the required direction 1 or 2.
컄컄
209
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
컄컄
Release the switch when the roller sunblinds have reached the desired position.
Warning!
G
When closing the roller sunblinds, make
sure that no one is in danger of being injured
by the closing procedure. The closing of the
roller sunblinds can be immediately halted
by releasing the switch.
Opening and closing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof
Warning!
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof can be
opened and closed electrically. The switch
for the panorama sliding/pop-up roof is on
the overhead control panel.
When opening or closing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof, make sure that there is
no danger of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof only operates with the sunblinds opened.
The opening procedure of the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately
halted by releasing the switch or, if the
switch was moved past the resistance point
and released, by moving the switch in any direction.
Fully opening the roller sunblinds
(Express-open)
왘
Stopping the roller sunblinds
왘
The closing procedure of the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately
halted by releasing the switch.
Move the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof switch or the rear roller sunblind
switch past the resistance point in
direction 1 and release.
The roller sunblinds opens completely.
Move the switch in any direction.
210
G
1 Push back to slide roof open
2 Push forward to slide roof closed
3 Push up to raise roof
4 Pull down to lower roof
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
!
i
Do not transport any objects that protrude out of the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof as the seals could
be damaged.
You can also open or close the panorama sliding/pop-up roof using the:
Do not open the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof if there is snow or
ice on the roof, as this could result in
malfunctions.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof can
be opened or closed manually should
an electrical malfunction occur
(컄 page 364).
왘
Opening and closing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof
왘
To open or close the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch
to resistance point in the required
direction 1 to 4.
앫
SmartKey (summer opening/convenience future) (컄 page 203)
앫
button , in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 190)
앫
button e in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 196)
Fully opening the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof (Express-open)
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once
or twice.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof
opens completely.
Release the switch when the roof has
reached the desired position.
왘
Move the switch past the resistance
point in direction 1 and release.
i
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof cannot be closed fully (Express-close)
Stopping the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof
왘
Move the switch in any direction.
211
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing panorama
sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey
The power windows (컄 page 201) will also
be opened or closed when the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof is operated with the
SmartKey.
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility
of anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the remote control button.
To reverse direction of movement,
press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
왘
Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
handle.
212
Opening (Summer opening feature)
If roller sunblinds are already open:
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously:
왘
앫
opening the sliding/pop-up roof
앫
opening the side windows
앫
switching on the seat ventilation*
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.
The windows move down and the panorama sliding/pop-up roof tilts and
opens after approximately one second.
왘
Release transmit button to stop procedure.
If roller sunblinds are closed:
왘
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
The windows and roller sunblinds begin
to open after approximately
one second.
왘
The windows and panorama
sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after
approximately one second.
Press and hold button Πagain.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof tilts
and opens.
Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
왘
Release the ‹ button to stop procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the panorama sliding/pop-up roof are properly
closed before leaving the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Closing the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning!
The power windows (컄 page 201) will also
be closed when the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof is operated with
KEYLESS-GO.
When closing the windows and the panorama sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that there is
no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
왘
Press and hold lock button at driver’s
door (컄 page 54) until the side windows and the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof are closed.
G
Synchronizing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof
It is necessary to resynchronize the panorama sliding/pop-up roof after
앫
voltage supply interruption due to a
disconnected or discharged battery
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫
the roof has been closed manually
앫
Release the lock button.
앫
앫
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long
as the door handle is held but the door
is not opened.
the roof has been opened with an
abrupt movement
앫
a malfunction.
왘
Remove the fuse from the main fuse
box (컄 page 389).
왘
Replace the fuse in the main fuse box.
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Press the switch in direction 2
(컄 page 210).
컄컄
213
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
컄컄 왘
Wait until the roller sunblinds are
closed and then keep the switch
pressed for approximately one second.
왘
Move the switch in direction 1
(컄 page 210).
왘
Wait until the roller sunblinds are
opened.
왘
왘
Move the switch in direction 3
(컄 page 210).
Wait until the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof is raised and then
keep the switch pressed for approximately one second.
214
왘
Move the switch in direction 2
(컄 page 210).
왘
Wait until the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof is closed and then
keep the switch pressed for approximately one second.
The panorama sliding/pop up roof is
synchronized.
The synchronization must be repeated if
the panorama sliding/pop-up roof cannot
be fully opened (Express-open).
Solar panel*
A solar panel is available in combination
with the panorama sliding/pop-up roof.
The solar cells convert natural light into
electrical energy. When the engine is
switched off, the energy generated automatically switches on the ventilation fan.
The constant air flow creates a cooler temperature for cars parked in the sunlight.
The air flow depends on the intensity of the
solar radiation. The ventilation starts two
minutes after switching off the engine.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The following driving systems are explained on the following pages:
앫
Cruise control and Distronic*, with
which the vehicle can maintain a preset
speed
앫
Airmatic* adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics automatically and
controls the vehicle level
앫
Parktronic system*, which assists the
driver during parking maneuvers
The BAS, ABS, ESP and SBC are described
in the “Safety and Security” section
(컄 page 80).
Cruise control
Warning!
The cruise control automatically maintains
the speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set any speed
over 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column (컄 page 20).
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
215
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i
!
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume at previously set speed
Saving current speed
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
216
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached.
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
The new speed is set.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 4.
The cruise control will resume the last
previously set speed.
왘
i
왘
G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
Setting a higher speed
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Setting a lower speed
왘
Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1.
Slower
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2.
The new speed is set.
217
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic*
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control
during travel on expressways and other
major roads.
앫
앫
If the Distronic distance sensor detects
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so
that you follow that vehicle at a preset
distance.
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the same
way as cruise control (컄 page 222).
Warning!
G
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does
not react to stationary objects, nor recognize or predict the curvature and lane layout
or the movement of vehicles ahead.
Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
of the vehicle’s braking power.
218
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to traffic and road conditions
and to provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to retain control
of the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed
adjustment reduction capability is intended
to make cruise control more effective and
usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it
is not intended to, nor does it, replace the
need for extreme care. The responsibility for
the vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead, including most importantly
brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests with the driver.
Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account.
Warning!
G
Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
앫
this device may not cause harmful
interference, and
앫
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if
the road, weather and traffic conditions
make it advisable to travel at a steady
speed.
Warning!
G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain,
snow or sleet.
Warning!
G
Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not Distronic is activated.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady
speed.
Distronic will not react to stationary objects
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Distronic is designed and intended only to
maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it.
Warning!
G
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
Switch off Distronic:
앫
when changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
앫
when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫
in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
219
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the following warning note.
Distronic displays in the speedometer
dial
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the red DTR warning lamp l
goes out when the necessary distance
to the vehicle ahead is again established.
1 Segments
1 Set speed
If Distronic is activated, one or two segments come on around the set speed.
i
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the
speed setting on the Distronic system.
220
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the segments from the speed of the
vehicle ahead to the set speed come on.
If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision:
앫
The DTR warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on red.
앫
An intermittent warning sounds.
왘
Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
a collision.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
An intermittent warning sounds and the
DTR warning lamp in the instrument cluster
is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead
and your vehicle’s current speed indicate
that Distronic will not be capable of slowing
the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision.
Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).
This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
the distance to the vehicle in front of you.
The warning sound is intended as a final caution that you have not interceded with your
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking, as that will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact being avoided.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the Distronic system.
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
restore the preset distance or to maintain
the speed. The brake pedal is automatically
applied as this happens which results in the
brake pedal moving.
Distronic menu in the control system
In the Distronic menu you can read the current settings for Distronic. What appears in
the display depends on whether Distronic
and the distance warning function are
turned on or off.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following displays.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
221
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic deactivated
Distronic activated
Cruise control lever
If Distronic is deactivated you can see the
standard display of Distronic in the multifunction display.
If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set
speed in the multifunction display for
about five seconds. If Distronic is
activated, you can see the following display in the multifunction display.
The Distronic system is operated by means
of the cruise control lever.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
222
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column.
1 Distronic activated
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Resume at previously set speed
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Distronic
Setting the current speed
Setting a higher speed
You can activate Distronic if:
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
왘
Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
lever.
앫
앫
you are driving between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h)
the ESP is activated (컄 page 82)
If Distronic has not been activated after
pressing the cruise control lever you will
see the message --- in the multifunction
display.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
앫
Up to two minutes after starting the engine
앫
When you brake
앫
If you have set the parking brake
앫
If the gear selector lever is in
position P, R or N
앫
If the ESP is switched off
Distronic is activated and the current
speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i
If you do not take your foot off the
accelerator completely, the following
message will appear in the multifunction display:
Distronic override. The distance to a
slower moving vehicles in front of you
will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position.
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 222) to
increase vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately
five seconds (컄 page 222), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
come on on the speedometer
(컄 page 220).
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control will resume the last speed set.
223
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a lower speed
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 222) to
decrease vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately
five seconds (컄 page 222), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
come on on the speedometer
(컄 page 220).
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 222).
Setting stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
i
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the rate of deceleration is too low.
224
G
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 222).
Distronic is activated and set to the last
stored speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating Distronic
Distronic deactivates automatically when:
There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system:
앫
you set the parking brake
앫
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 222).
you drive slower than 25 mph
(40 km/h)
앫
the ESP is active (컄 page 82) or you deactivate the ESP
Step on the brake pedal.
앫
you move the transmission selector lever into position N
왘
or
왘
Distronic will be deactivated. The last
speed set will be stored in memory.
i
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display for approximately five seconds: Distronic off.
The last stored speed is deleted when
you turn off the engine.
A signal will sound. The Distronic off
message appears in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
Warning!
G
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time the driver must apply the
brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop.
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
this time setting and the current speed of
your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set distance will be shown
in the multifunction display field.
The thumbwheel for making the time setting is located on the lower section of the
center console.
Warning!
G
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.
225
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘
Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ®.
Distance warning function
1 Distance warning function on/off
switch
2 Control lamp
3 Thumbwheel for setting distance
When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
the danger of a collision exists:
앫
The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.
앫
An intermittent warning sounds.
Increasing distance
Increasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a greater following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘
Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯.
If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also
stops when the distance to the vehicle
226
ahead is sufficient again without applying
the brake pedal. In this case the distance
warning lamp also extinguishes.
Warning!
G
If the DTR warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on while driving and/or
an intermittent warning sounds, immediate
attention on the part of the driver is required.
As required by the traffic situation, apply the
brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on
the distance warning function, as this will result in an emergency braking application.
Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this will not always
enable you to avoid a collision.
i
Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic. This
could result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating
Driving with Distronic
왘
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations. This will
deactivate the Distronic system.
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 on the button comes
on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in
the multifunction display (컄 page 222).
Deactivating
왘
G
Press button 1.
Warning!
Indicator lamp 2 on the button goes
out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a distance set by Distronic). This means that:
앫
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes
앫
While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead
of it, but does not register stationary objects
in the road, e.g.:
앫
A stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
앫
A disabled vehicle
앫
An oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by
steering or braking the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
road conditions.
227
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
Distronic will switch off, and the message
Currently unavailable see oper.
manual appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic system
sensor” (컄 page 307).
228
i
Turns and bends
If the message “Distronic - clean sensor!” See oper. manual disappears during driving and the last speed stored
flashes for approximately five seconds,
the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved;
Distronic works again.
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving
Lane changing
Narrow vehicles
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Because of its narrow profile, the vehicle
traveling near the edge of the roadway has
not yet been detected by Distronic. There
will be insufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
229
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)*
Airmatic automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for
your vehicle. The Airmatic consists of two
components:
앫
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
앫
Vehicle level control
The ADS automatically selects the optimum damping for the respective driving
conditions. At the same time the suspension is set to either sporty or comfort.
왘
Start the engine.
왘
Comfortable
Press the damping button 1 until the
desired suspension style is set.
Both indicator lamps 2 are off.
i
Sporty I
The selected suspension style is stored
in memory, even after the SmartKey is
removed from the starter switch.
The following suspension styles are
available:
앫
앫
One indicator lamp 2 is on.
앫
Sporty II
Both indicator lamps 2 are on.
In the sporty suspension style the vehicle is lowered up to 0.6 in (15 mm).
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to:
앫
Your driving style
앫
Road surface conditions
앫
Your choice of suspension style,
“sporty I”, “sporty II” or “comfortable”,
which you select using the damping
button.
230
i
1 Damping button
2 Indicator lamps
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicle level control
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to
앫
reduce fuel consumption
앫
increase vehicle safety
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
Select the “Raised” level only when required by current driving conditions. Otherwise
앫
앫
fuel consumption may increase
앫
handling may be impaired
The following vehicle chassis ride heights
can be selected:
앫
Normal
앫
Raised
앫
At a speed above approximately above
68 mph (110 km/h) and the sporty
suspension style selected
(컄 page 230), ride height is reduced
automatically by up to approximately
0.6 in (15 mm).
With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the “Normal” level.
i
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.
These height adjustments are so small
that you may not notice any change.
231
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine is running:
Vehicle level when Use for
stationary
Ride height increase
over normal
Automatic lowering
Indicator lamp (컄 page 232)
Normal
Normal operation None
Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm)
Lamp off
Raised
Driving with snow Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm)
chains or very
rough road surface conditions
Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm)
Lamp on
The button is located in the lower section
of the center console.
왘
Briefly press button 1 to change from
“Normal” level to “Raised” level. When
vehicle is at “Raised” level, pressing
the switch will return the vehicle to
“Normal” level.
i
At a speed of approximately above
75 mph (120 km/h) or if the speed
amounts to between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h)
1 Vehicle level control button
2 Indicator lamp
232
for approximately five minutes, the setting “Raised” is canceled. The message
Level selec. canceled appears in the
multifunction display.
If you do not drive in this speed range,
the “Raised” level remains stored even
if the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system* (Parking assist)
Warning!
Warning!
G
The Parktronic system is a supplemental
system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical
maneuvers always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by
the system and can damage the vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice. See
“Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors”
(컄 page 307).
G
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
the area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition
and release the parking brake. The
Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
over 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds
the Parktronic system turns on again.
1 Sensors in the front bumper
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration.
233
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damage the sensors.
Front sensors
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
!
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The
Parktronic system will not detect such
objects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
234
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the warning lamps come on and
you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is
closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance might no longer be indicated
by the system.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
front area is located above the center air
vents in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear area is integrated in the
rear trim.
Each warning indicator is divided into six
yellow and two red segments for either
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system
is ready when the border around the indicator is illuminated.
1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of
three seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the selector lever is placed
in position P and the parking brake is
activated.
앫
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of
three seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the selector lever is placed
in position D or P and the parking
brake is activated.
The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be
activated.
Selector lever po- Warning indicator
sition
Front area warning indicator
앫
D
Front area activated
R or N
Front and rear area
activated
P
Neither activated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more segments will come on, depending
on the distance. When the eighth segment
comes on, you have reached the minimum
distance.
235
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system
on/off
Switching off the Parktronic system
왘
You can switch off the Parktronic system
manually.
The Parktronic system switch is located in
the lower section of the center console.
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Switching on the Parktronic system
왘
Press button 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
If only the red segments of the Parktronic
system warning indicator come on and no
warning sounds, then the sensors of the
Parktronic system are dirty or malfunctioning. Malfunction may also be caused by interference from other radio or ultrasonic
signals. The Parktronic system will switch
itself off after 20 seconds.
왘
Clean Parktronic system sensors
(컄 page 307).
왘
Switch on the ignition.
Parktronic system malfunction
1 Parktronic system on/off
2 Indicator lamp
236
There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system if the red segments of the
Parktronic system warning indicator come
on and a warning sounds. The Parktronic
system will switch itself off after
30 seconds and the indicator lamp on the
Parktronic system switch comes on.
왘
Have the Parktronic system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
or
왘
Check Parktronic system operation at
another location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic
signals.
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Roof rack*
Warning!
Preparing roof rack installation
G
Use only roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.
왘
Open trim 1 at the trim strips in the
roof.
왘
Secure the roof rack according to manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Ski sack*
!
Load the roof rack in such a way that
the vehicle cannot be damaged while
driving.
Make sure
앫
앫
you can fully raise the
sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof*
Unfolding and loading
왘
Fold armrest down (arrow).
왘
Swing cover 1 down.
컄컄
you can fully open the trunk
1 Trim
237
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄
왘
Open hook and loop strap 1.
왘
Pull ski sack into passenger compartment and unfold.
왘
From trunk, slide skis into ski sack.
Warning!
G
The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs
of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
238
왘
Wrap strap around ski sack and armrest.
왘
Close clasp (arrows) and pull strap
tight to firmly secure skis.
Controls in detail
Loading
Unloading and folding
왘
Connect snap hook 1 of front strap to
eye 2 located on center tunnel in
front of rear seat bench.
왘
왘
Loosen strap, open clasp by pressing
tabs together (arrows).
왘
Unload skis.
왘
Close flap in trunk.
왘
Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise
and place folded ski sack inside recess
of backrest.
Close ski sack compartment cover.
239
Controls in detail
Loading
Removal of ski sack
For removal of the ski sack, we recommend that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Never drive vehicle with trunk open while
the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior, resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
i
To prevent unauthorized persons from
access to the trunk, always close the
cover.
Split rear bench seat*
To expand the trunk, you can fold down the
left and right rear seat backrests.
The two sections can be folded down separately to enlarge the trunk.
240
Warning!
G
When expanding the luggage compartment,
always fold the seat cushions fully forward.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the backrests must remain properly locked in the upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
1 Release handle
i
If tall persons have occupied the driver’s and front passenger seats, it may
be necessary to move these seats forward slightly in order to fold the rear
seat backrests forward.
Always use the cargo tie down rings
(컄 page 244).
Folding the backrest forward
!
You must always release the seat cushion and fold it up before folding the seat
backrests forward. The upholstery on
the seat backrest may otherwise be
damaged.
왘
Pull release handle 1.
The seat cushion automatically springs
upward slightly.
Controls in detail
Loading
Returning seat backrest to original position
1 Seat cushion
2 Seat backrest
왘
Grip the back of seat cushion 1 and
fold forward.
왘
Push the rear seat head restraints all
the way in.
i
If the rear center seat is to be occupied
while driving, it may be necessary to
fold the seat belt buckle up again.
왘
Pull the handle in the trunk.
The seat backrest is released and the
head restraints fold back.
왘
Fold the seat backrest forward.
1 Seat cushion
2 Seat backrest
왘
Swing seat backrest 2 to the rear until
it engages.
왘
Swing seat cushion 1 to the rear and
press the center front of the cushion
until it audibly engages.
컄컄
!
Make sure the head restraints fit all the
way into the seat cushion pockets. This
will prevent the backrests from being
damaged during loading.
241
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄
Warning!
G
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied, or the extended trunk compartment is not in use.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest.
왘
Swing the head restraint forward by
hand until it engages.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Expanding the cargo area*
Removing the rear seat cushions will provide you with a larger, flat cargo area.
왘
Fold the seat cushions and the backrests forward.
왘
Remove the head restraints
(컄 page 116).
왘
Fold the backrest into the vertical position.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.
1 Release lever
왘
242
Pull seat cushion release lever 1 and
remove the seat cushion by pulling it
upward.
Controls in detail
Loading
!
Loading instructions
Leave the seat cushion hinge in this position. The upholstery could be damaged if you fold the hinge back.
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
왘
Fold the seat backrest forward.
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
on the certification tag which can be found
on the left door pillar.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possible since it influences the handling characteristics of
the vehicle.
243
Controls in detail
Loading
Warning!
G
Cargo tie-down rings*
There is a cargo tie-down ring located on
each side of the footwell under the rear
seat.
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
Do not place anything on the rear-window
shelf.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
244
Rear seat
Four rings 1 are located in the trunk.
왘
Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
Always follow loading instructions
(컄 page 243).
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Storage compartments
Warning!
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
Glove box
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
1 Glove box lid release
2 Compartment for mobile
phone/glasses
G
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the shelf
below the rear window.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
Opening the glove box
Warning!
G
The parcel net is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net.
왘
Push lid release 1.
The glove box lid opens downward.
Closing the glove box
왘
Push lid up to close.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
245
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
왘
Prior to closing the glove box, close the
compartment for glasses first.
Press button 1 to open.
왘
The control panel swings out upward
and the storage compartment extends
out.
Storage compartment in the center
console (no CD changer* installed)
Briefly press the marking in the back of
the cover.
The cover opens.
i
Never place any medications in the
storage compartment. If there is a power failure, the storage compartment
cannot be opened.
왘
Press button 1 to close.
Cup holder in the center console
1 Opening/closing button
왘
Briefly press marking on the cup holder.
The cup holder extends automatically.
i
The cup holder can be removed for
cleaning. Clean the cup holder only
with clear, lukewarm water.
Make sure to insert the cup holder in
the guides when reinstalling it.
246
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage space under armrest
Front center console storage compartment ventilation
The front center console storage compartment under the armrest in your vehicle
may have its own air vent. The air temperature is about the same as that of the
dashboard air vents.
1 Left cup holder
2 Right cup holder
Warning!
G
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed
while traveling. Place only containers that fit
into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids
on open containers and do not fill containers
to a height where the contents, especially
hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.
1 Storage compartment
2 Storage tray
If the front center console storage compartment in your vehicle is equipped with
its own air vent, the lever is located in the
front center vent.
Opening storage tray
왘
Pull handle 2.
Opening storage compartment
왘
Pull handle 1.
1 Lever
왘
To open air vent slide the lever up.
왘
To close air vent slide the lever down. 컄컄
247
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄
i
Ruffled storage bags
Storage compartment in the rear armrest
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects (e.g. groceries)
in the compartment, close the air vent
while heating the passenger compartment
Storage compartment in the rear center console
Ruffled storage bags are located on the
back of the front seats.
Warning!
G
The ruffled storage bag is intended for storing light-weight items only.
왘
Briefly press the top of the compartment.
It extends automatically.
248
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
ruffled storage bag.
The ruffled storage bag cannot protect
transported goods in the event of an accident.
왘
Press the handle upward and fold the
armrest up.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear cup holder
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
i
A small rubber mat is located in the
glove box. If you wish to store
coins/tokens, remove the ashtray insert and insert the rubber mat in its
place. Empty ashtray insert and store it
in a convenient location in the vehicle.
Warning!
왘
Briefly press the front of the center
armrest.
The cup holder extends automatically.
Warning!
G
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed
while traveling. Place only containers that fit
into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids
on open containers and do not fill containers
to a height where the contents, especially
hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.
Opening ashtray
왘
Briefly press the marking on the bottom of cover 1.
G
Only use rubber mat in conjunction with
storing coins/tokens. Always remove rubber mat and/or all other contents and reinsert ashtray insert before placing hot
cigarettes or other hot smoking materials in
this compartment.
The ashtray opens automatically.
249
Controls in detail
Useful features
Reinstalling ashtray insert
Removing ashtray insert
Warning!
G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N, turn off the engine.
왘
왘
Install insert by pushing it back into
frame until it engages again.
Rear seat ashtray
왘
The cigarette lighter is located in the center console compartment in front of the
armrest (컄 page 26).
Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. Move the gear
selector lever to position N.
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
왘
Cigarette lighter
Push sliding button 2 to the right and
hold.
Grip and remove insert from ashtray
frame.
250
1 Cigarette lighter
Opening rear seat ashtray
왘
Briefly press the top of the ashtray.
The ashtray opens.
왘
Turn ignition on.
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
12-V socket*
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up
to a maximum 85 W.
Heated steering wheel*
The stalk with the heated steering wheel
switch is on the lower left-hand side of the
steering wheel.
The socket is located in the rear of the center console storage compartment.
The socket can be used for accessories up
to a maximum of 180 W.
1 Indicator lamp
2 Switching off
3 Switching on
251
Controls in detail
Useful features
Switching on
왘
왘
Warning!
Switch on ignition.
G
All lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
Warning!
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow 3.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 1 comes on.
Switching off
왘
Telephone*
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direction of arrow 2.
The heated steering wheel is turned off.
Indicator lamp 1 goes out.
i
The steering wheel heating does not
turn off automatically.
252
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his /her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
G
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
You can take and place telephone calls using the s and t buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
(컄 page 134).
See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone.
Warning!
G
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for
safety reasons, the driver should not use the
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before answering or placing a call.
Tele Aid*
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
SOS button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
SOS button stays on after turning the
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2, or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice
to position 2. The message Tele Aid –
not activated will be shown in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫
automatic and manual emergency
앫
roadside assistance and
앫
information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç.
왘
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
253
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
!
The SOS button is located above the interior rear view mirror.
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located below the center armrest cover.
Shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password via first call mail. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock and
more.
254
System self-check
Initially, after turning the ignition on, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the
indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ stay on longer
than ten seconds or do not come on). The
message TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP! appears for approximately 10 seconds in the
multifunction display.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or the message TELE
AID - VISIT WORKSHOP! is displayed in
the multifunction display after the system
self-check, a malfunction in the system has
been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically:
앫
앫
following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
or air bags deploy
if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 89) and tow-away alarm
(컄 page 90)
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See below for instructions on
initiating an emergency call manually.
tion display. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established,
the audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction display. The Response Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
앫
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the Response
Center
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the
Response Center.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc-
255
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction
display for approximately 10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
Initiating an emergency call manually
Warning!
1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
왘
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
256
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.
왘
Close cover after the emergency call is
concluded.
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Roadside Assistance button •.
왘
Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established, the
audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID – ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction
display.
왘
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
앫
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and actual vehicle data.
i
The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approximately
10 seconds during the system
self-check after turning the ignition on
(together with the SOS button and the
Information button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 254)
when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button • is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display.
257
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the tbutton on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Information button ¡
The Information button ¡ is located below the center armrest cover.
왘
Press and hold button (for longer than
2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will
appear in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
system will transmit data generating the
vehicle identification number, model, color
and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
258
lished. When a voice connection is established, the audio system is muted and the
message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE
appears in the multifunction display. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).
i
The indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approximately 10 seconds during
the system self-check after turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance
button •).
See system self-check (컄 page 254)
when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available). The message INFO –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated using the tbutton on the multifunction steering wheel.
Controls in detail
Useful features
!
Upgrade signals
!
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
as possible.
The Tele Aid system processes calls using
the following priority:
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
Canada.
앫
Automatic emergency – First priority
앫
Manual emergency – Second priority
앫
Roadside assistance – Third priority
앫
Information – Fourth priority
Should a higher priority call be initiated
while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard, and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to retransmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is concluded, a beep will be heard and the respective
indicator lamp will stop flashing. The
COMAND system operation will resume.
i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing button t on the multifunction steering wheel.
259
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
Remote door unlock
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the COMAND system audio is muted
and the selected mode (radio or CD)
pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
installed) switches off. If you must use
this phone, the vehicle must be parked.
Disconnect the coiled cord and place
the call. The COMAND navigation*
system (if engaged) will continue to
run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use, and spoken
commands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND
unit. A pop-up window will appear in
the COMAND display to indicate that a
Tele Aid call is in progress.
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
왘
왘
i
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
The SOS button will flash and the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of
the door unlock command.
Then return to your vehicle and pull the
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
260
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt
to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled
for more than 20 seconds before door
unlock authorization was received by
the Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen vehicle tracking services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident report.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
Garage door opener
Warning!
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices, for example garage door openers,
gate openers, or other devices compatible
with HomeLink® or some other systems.
You can program the signal transmitter
buttons.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele
Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact
the local law enforcement and you. The
vehicle’s location will only be provided
to law enforcement.
123 Signal transmitter key
4
Indicator lamp
5
Hand-held transmitter button
6
Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of the vehicle
equipment)
G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects
are out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage.
When programming a garage door opener,
the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or
closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
that cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.
261
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
i
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
For operation in the USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
262
Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control
Step 1:
왘
Switch on ignition.
Step 2:
왘
If you have previously programmed an
integrated signal transmitter button
and wish to retain its programming,
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 1 and 3 and release
them only when the indicator light begins to flash after approximately 20
seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 3:
i
i
왘
The indicator lamp 4 flashes the first
time the signal transmitter button is
programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp
will only start flashing after 20 seconds.
If the indicator lamp 4 blinks rapidly
for about two seconds and then turns
to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped
with the “rolling code” feature.
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
control transmitter 6 of the device
you wish to train approximately 2 to
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface
of the integrated remote control located on the interior rear view mirror,
keeping the indicator lamp 4 in view.
Step 4:
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held transmitter
button 5 and the desired integrated
signal transmitter button (1, 2
or 3). Do not release the buttons until
completing step 5.
The indicator lamp 4 on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
Step 5:
Step 7:
왘
왘
When the indicator lamp 4 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons.
Step 6:
왘
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Press and hold the just-trained integrated signal transmitter button and
observe the indicator lamp 4.
If the indicator lamp 4 stays on constantly, programming is complete and
your device should activate when the
integrated signal transmitter button is
pressed and released.
263
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming
Step 9:
Step 12:
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
왘
왘
Step 8:
왘
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step.
Step 10:
왘
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button may also be referred to as
“learn”or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button,
refer to the garage door opener operator’s manual.
264
Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (1, 2
or 3).
Step 11:
왘
Press, hold for two seconds and release same button a second time to
complete the training process.
Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (1, 2
or 3).
Step 13:
왘
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Controls in detail
Useful features
If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Operation of integrated remote control
i
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (1,
2 or 3) to activate the remote controlled device.
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
Step 4:
왘
왘
Continue to press and hold the integrated signal transmitter button (1,
2 or 3) while you press and re-press
(“cycle”) your hand-held remote control transmitter 6 every two seconds
until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, the
indicator lamp 4 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds.
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Simultaneously hold down the signal
transmitter buttons 1 and 3, for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lamp 4 blinks rapidly. Do not
hold for longer than 30 seconds.
Reprogramming a single integrated
signal transmitter button
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
왘
Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (1, 2 or 3). Do not release the button.
왘
The indicator lamp will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
integrated signal transmitter button,
proceed with programming starting
with step 3.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
265
266
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
267
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
왔 The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2⁄ 3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the selector lever.
앫
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
268
!
Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
앫
During the first 1000 miles
(1500 km), do not exceed a speed
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫
During this period, avoid engine
speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.
All of the above, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first
1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or
the rear differential has been replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Remove roof rack when not in use.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the Service
Booklet and as required by the FSS.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
Warning!
G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.
269
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Warning!
G
The brake system requires electrical energy
for operation.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 314) and
warning messages in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 321) come on while driving. To
brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may
only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
270
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the
recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on
the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground is only permissible for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For
more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 385). For more information,
see “The SBC brake system” (컄 page 85).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
Operation
Driving instructions
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, there is a malfunction in the
SBC brake system (컄 page 85) or the
brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.
G
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
Have the brake system inspected by qualified technicians immediately. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Be certain to read and observe the warning
notices on brake pad replacement
(컄 page 329).
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 82).
Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
!
Warning!
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so that the air stream will cool
down the brakes faster.
271
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving off
Parking
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move gear selector lever to position P.
When parking on hills, always set the
parking brake and turn front wheel
against road curb.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drive train which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
272
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the selector lever to position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
when leaving.
Tires
Warning!
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Operation
Driving instructions
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs.
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1⁄ 16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be replaced.
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the tread wear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
273
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to make sure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
274
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
E 320, E 320 4MATIC
E 500, E 500 4MATIC
E 320 4MATIC (Appearance Package*)
E 500 4MATIC (Appearance Package*)
Tire speed rating
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
E 320 (Appearance Package*)
E 500 (Appearance Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 168 mph (270 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
Operation
Driving instructions
E 320 (Sport Package*),
E 500 (Sport Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Z”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of above 149 mph (240 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
E 320 4MATIC (Sport Package*)
E 500 4MATIC (Sport Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with min.
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of above 186 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
E 55 AMG
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Z”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of above 149 mph (240 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
i
For information on speed ratings for
winter tires, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 297).
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
i
For more information on driving with
snow chains, see “Snow chains”
(컄 page 298).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
275
Operation
Driving instructions
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
Warning!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind
G
Warning!
Make sure not to endarger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
G
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 297)
276
Standing water
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Operation
Driving instructions
Control and operation of radio transmitter
Passenger compartment
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
COMAND, radio and telephone*
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
Warning!
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Telephones and two-way radios
1
Observe all legal requirements
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
277
Operation
Driving instructions
Catalytic converter
Warning!
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet.
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat, which could
start a fire.
278
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Service
Booklet.
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.
Coolant temperature
Warning!
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately
248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
279
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
왘
Refueling
Warning!
The fuel filler flap springs open.
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
왘
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
왘
280
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
왘
Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
to it until possible pressure is released.
왘
Take off the cap and set it in the recess
on the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
Turn the engine off
앫
by turning the SmartKey to
position 0.
앫
by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button. Open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is now in
position 0, same as SmartKey removed from starter switch).
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
Operation
At the gas station
왘
Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
right.
Close the fuel filler flap.
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and
the ? lamp to illuminate.
i
See also “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 317).
You will hear when the fuel cap is tightened.
왘
i
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
Check regularly and before a long trip
1 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
For more information on refilling the
reservoir (컄 page 289).
2 Brake fluid
More information on brake fluid can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 409).
3 Coolant level
More information on the coolant level
(컄 page 287).
281
Operation
At the gas station
!
Engine oil level
Tire inflation pressure
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately. Do not add brake
fluid as this will not solve the problem.
For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 314).
More information on engine oil
(컄 page 284).
More information on tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 292).
282
See also “Opening hood” (컄 page 283).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 365).
See also the section on the exterior lamp
switch (컄 page 124).
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
왘
Hood
Warning!
G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
Pull lever 1 downwards.
왘
The hood is unlocked and handle 2
will extend out of the radiator grille.
Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator grille.
왘
Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on
the handle) and then release it.
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Opening
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Warning!
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
1 Hood release
2 Handle for opening the hood
The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
283
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
284
Closing
Warning!
Engine oil
G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
왘
왘
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
i
Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz will
restrict your warranty entitlement.
More information on this subject is
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level
i
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press the k or j
button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
앫
be parked on level ground
앫
be at normal operating temperature
앫
have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
To check the engine oil level via the multifunction display, do the following:
왘
앫
Engine oil level ok
앫
Add 1.0 qt. to reach max. oil
level!
Switch on ignition.
The standard display (컄 page 139) should
appear in the multifunction display.
왘
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the indicator:
Press button k or j, on the
steering wheel until the following
message is seen in the multifunction
display:
Engine oil level - Measuring now!
Measurement correct only if veh.
level
(Canada: 1.0 liter)
앫
앫
Add 1.5 qts. to reach max. oil
level!
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil see (컄 page 286).
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 406) and (컄 page 409).
Other display messages
(Canada: 1.5 liters)
If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button* is not in position 2, the following
message will appear:
Add 2.0 qts. to reach max. oil
level!
Turn on ignition
to see engine oil level!
(Canada: 2.0 liters)
왘
Switch on the ignition.
If you see the message:
Observe waiting period
285
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
왘
If engine is at normal operating
temperature, wait five minutes before
repeating check procedure.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:
If engine is not yet at normal operating
temperature, wait 30 minutes before
repeating check procedure.
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level!
If you see the message:
Engine oil level
Not when engine on!
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
If the engine is at normal operating
temperature, wait five minutes before
checking oil.
왘
If the engine is not yet at normal
operating temperature, you must wait
30 minutes before checking oil.
286
왘
Have excess oil siphoned or drained
off. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
More information on messages in the
display concerning engine oil can be found
in the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 336).
Adding engine oil
!
Only use approved engine oils. For a
listing of approved engine oils, refer to
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio.
In addition, check the oil filler cap for
important information pertaining to the
engine oil needing to meet a specific
Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB
229.5). If such information is printed
on the oil filler cap, only use an engine
oil from the list of approved engine oils
in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that meets the specification indicated on the oil filler cap.
Using engine oils of other specification
may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Operation
Engine compartment
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
왘
1 Filler cap
왘
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 406) and (컄 page 409).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the driver’s side of the engine compartment.
287
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
왘
G
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 411).
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫
앫
앫
앫
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
1 Coolant expansion tank
왘
Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure.
왘
Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level:
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
왘
288
Replace and tighten cap.
앫
for cold coolant: reaches the black
top part of the reservoir
앫
for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
Add coolant as required.
앫
Auxiliary battery (located in the engine
compartment).
앫
Main battery (starter and electrical
consumers; located in the trunk).
These batteries should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve their
rated service life. Refer to Service Booklet
for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.
Operation
Engine compartment
When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
G Observe
automotive batteries.
A Risk of explosion
flames or sparks away
from battery. Do not smoke.
D Keep
acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
B Battery
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
E
C
F
Wear eye protection.
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
Keep children away.
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
1 Washer fluid reservoir
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of:
앫
Vehicles without headlamp cleaning
system: approximately 4.8 US qt
(4.5 l).
앫
Vehicles with headlamp cleaning system: approximately 7.4 US qt (7 l).
289
Operation
Engine compartment
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.
i
If you are operating the vehicle where
temperatures may fall below freezing:
앫
Vehicles without heated windshield
washer system:
Use a fluid mixture (MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available washer solvent/antifreeze) that will provide
sufficient protection against freezing in the area you are operating the
vehicle in.
앫
Vehicles with heated windshield
washer system*:
A fluid mixture (MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate "S" and commercially available washer solvent/antifreeze) produced to resist
freezing at temperatures of approximately 14 ° F (-10 ° C) should be
sufficient.
290
To determine if your vehicle is
equipped with a heated windshield
washer system*, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
may ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield and
headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio”
(컄 page 413).
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged
앫
The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation.
Important guidelines
앫
Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire pressure loss and damage to
the tire beads.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
pressure and correct as required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1⁄ 8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
291
Operation
Tires and wheels
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
Life of tire
Direction of rotation
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, make sure
that the tires rotate in the direction specified.
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire pressure
앫
Distance driven
Warning!
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of tire rotation.
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Warning!
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the specified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
i
G
!
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
앫
Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Regularly check your tire pressure at intervals of no more than 14 days.
292
If the tires are warm, you should only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for current operating conditions.
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
maximum values or inflate tires below
the minimum values listed in the fuel
filler flap.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire pressure changes by approximately
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also
increased while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
Check the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.
Warning!
G
Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
You can select the unit of measure used for
the tire inflation pressure by changing the
setting in the control system (컄 page 148).
i
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and
the vehicle’s control system can occur.
The readings issued by the control system are more precise.
Checking tire pressure electronically*
The tire inflation pressure monitor only
functions on wheels that are equipped with
the proper electronic sensors. It monitors
the tire inflation pressure, as selected by
the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure
in one or more of the tires.
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Press the k button until the current
inflation pressures for each tire appear
in the multifunction display.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display (컄 page 134).The
present inflation pressures are displayed
only after a few minutes’ travel time.
293
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
The tire inflation pressure monitor does not
indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation
pressure according to the label on the fuel
filler cap.
The tire inflation pressure monitor is not
able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
maneuvers.
i
Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
radios) in or near the vehicle could
cause the tire inflation pressure monitor to malfunction.
294
Activating the tire inflation pressure
monitor
You must activate the tire inflation pressure monitor in the following cases:
앫
If you have changed the tire pressure
앫
If you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫
If you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘
Make sure the tire pressure is correctly
set.
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 139).
왘
Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the current inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
display or the following message appears in the display
Tire pressure
display after driv. a few mins.
Reactivate using R button
i
If transporting a deflated road wheel or
additional wheel sensors in the vehicle,
the tire inflation pressure monitor
should not be reactivated until the deflated wheel or additional wheel sensors have been removed from the
vehicle. Otherwise, the deflated wheel
or additional sensors could cause the
tire inflation pressure monitor system
to malfunction.
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 22).
If you wish to cancel activation:
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
왘
Check current
tire pressure?
왘
Press the æ button.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display field:
Tire pressure
monitor activated
The tire inflation pressure monitor will
now monitor the tire inflation pressure
values of all four tires.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display field:
Tire pressure
display after driv. a few mins.
Reactivate using R button
This display appears until the individual
inflation pressure values are matched
with the tires. The individual values are
then displayed (컄 page 343).
Rotating wheels
Press the ç button.
G
If the following message appears in the
multifunction display field:
Warning!
Reactivate tire
Pres. monitor
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size.
or
Tire pres.
Check tires!
왘
Check the tire inflation pressures and
correct them if necessary.
왘
Reactivate the tire inflation pressure
monitor.
On vehicles with the same wheel size all
around, wheels can be rotated every 3000
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or
sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same direction of tire
rotation must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and
make sure proper tire inflation pressure.
295
Operation
Tires and wheels
!
If your vehicle is equipped with a tire inflation pressure monitor*, there are
electronic components built into the
wheel.
Do not use mounting tools in the area
of the valve as they could damage the
electronic components.
To prevent damage or incorrect installation, have the tires changed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
296
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 356) and
(컄 page 372).
Operation
Winter driving
왔 Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for temperatures below freezing point
(컄 page 412).
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to make
sure that the engine can be started and
the SBC brake system will be fully operational, even at low ambient temperatures.
앫
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP and 4MATIC in
winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure that all
mounted winter tires are of the same make
and have the same tread design.
Warning!
G
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
longer suitable for winter operation.
297
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater* (Canada only)
i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
(컄 page 84) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the vehicle’s traction.
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains
!
When driving with snow chains, always
select the raised level of the level control system Airmatic* (컄 page 231).
Other settings may result in damage to
your vehicle.
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
298
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
앫
Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer's mounting instructions.
앫
Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.
앫
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
!
Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive,
use snow chains on rear tires only.
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with spare wheels (Minispare wheel or
collapsible tire) and with tires of size
265/35 ZR18 (컄 page 398).
Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
Flexible Service System PLUS
(FSS PLUS)
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Service Booklet at the times called for
by the FSS PLUS
(Flexible Service System PLUS).
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times/mileage called for by
the FSS PLUS may result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
FSS PLUS will notify you when your next
service is due.
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):
Service
Service
Service
Service
A
A
A
A
in XXXX miles (km)
in XX days
in X day
due now!
The type of service due is indicated in the
speedometer display field:
from
Service A
(Minor service)
to
Service H
(Major service)
i
The additional + after the type of service indicates the degree of wear of the
brake pads.
The brake pads may reach their wear
limit in the time period up to the next
service interval.
Have the brake pads checked and, if
necessary, replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center during your
next service appointment.
i
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
299
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the service indicator
Calling up the service indicator
Resetting the service indicator
You can clear the service indicator
왘
In the event that a service on your vehicle
is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
service indicator yourself.
왘
Press the j button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The service indicator is cleared and the
standard display appears in the multifunction display.
Service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display:
Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)
Service A exceeded by XXX days
Service A exceeded by X day
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the service indicator following a completed service.
300
Switch the ignition on.
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 134).
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the
FSS PLUS indicator appears in the multifunction display.
i
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the service indicator. To arrive at the true service deadline, you will need to subtract these
days from the days shown in the service indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
왘
Switch the ignition on.
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 139).
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the
FSS PLUS indicator appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 22) for
about five seconds.
Operation
Maintenance
The service indicator now displays the
The Service menu appears in the multifunction display.
Full service menu.
왘
Press the ÿ button.
The words service confirmed appear
in the multifunction display.
왘
Select the Confirmation menu with the
+ or - button.
왘
Press the ÿ button.
The service indicator now displays the
Confirmation menu.
The selection marker is on Full service.
왘
The service indicator is reset.
왘
Press the è button on the multifunction steering wheel until the standard display appears in the
multifunction display.
FSS PLUS now recalculates the values.
You cannot call up the service display or
the service menu during this time.
i
If the service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing proper service as
called for by the FSS PLUS will cause
the FSS PLUS to incorrectly determine
the next service interval which will result in engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Press the ÿ button.
301
Operation
Maintenance
Setting the date for special works
You can enter appointments for exhaust
gas analysis and general inspection over
FSS PLUS.
왘
왘
Select the Addit. Work menu with the
+ or - button.
왘
Press the ÿ button.
왘
Press the ÿ button.
The service indicator now displays the
Next due date menu.
The service indicator now displays the
Addit. Work menu.
Switch ignition on.
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 134).
왘
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the
FSS PLUS indicator appears in the multifunction display.
Press the reset button (컄 page 22) for
about five seconds.
The Service menu appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Select the Exh.-gas analysis or
General Inspection menu with the
+ or - button.
왘
Select the Month and Year with the
+ or - button.
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel to set the
month and year.
왘
Select Confirm with the + or button.
왘
Press the ÿ button.
The new date is set.
302
Operation
Maintenance
왘
Press the è button on the multifunction steering wheel until the standard display appears in the
multifunction display.
FSS PLUS now recalculates the values.
You cannot call up the service display or
the service menu during this time.
Calling up the service item menu
왘
The service items to be carried out under
the corresponding service type can be displayed in the multifunction display.
Switch ignition on.
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 139).
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the
FSS PLUS indicator appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 22) for
about five seconds.
Calling up the service data information
FSS PLUS shows the service type (letters
A-H) in the multifunction display approximately one month before the service appointment is due in miles (distance
criterion) or in days (time criterion).
This service type is based on the service
items to be carried out. The service items
are described in the Service Booklet.
The service indicator now displays the
Items menu.
i
The service items to be carried out are
shown in this menu.
The Service menu appears in the multifunction display (컄 page 139).
왘
왘
Select the Items menu with the +
or - button.
Press the ÿ button.
Please refer to the Service Booklet for
a description of each service item.
왘
Press button è on the multifunction
steering wheel until the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display.
303
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the
undercarriage and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫
Near the ocean
앫
In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
Tar
앫
During winter operation
Gravel and stone chipping
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
앫
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
304
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet “Vehicle Care Guide”.
Power washer
Tar stains
When using a power wash for cleaning the
vehicle, always observe the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
!
Never use a round nozzle to
power-wash tires. The intense jet of
water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not“bead up”, normally
every three to five months, depending on
climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
305
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning.
Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
the vehicle through an automatic car wash
to prevent damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the undercarriage, do not
forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
Vehicle washing
i
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
306
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor
cover
i
Restart the engine after cleaning sensor cover 1.
Cleaning the Parktronic* system
sensors
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Wiper blades
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms away
from the windshield to a vertical position only. They could otherwise damage the hood.
1 Distronic system sensor cover
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water to clean sensor
cover 1.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a
dry cloth or sponge.
왘
1 Parktronic* sensors
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo
with plenty of water.
Turn on the wipers and place it in a vertical position.
For information on placing the wipers in a
vertical position, see “Replacing wiper
blades” (컄 page 370).
컄컄
When using a steam cleaner or power
washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm) at
sensors 1.
307
Operation
Vehicle care
컄컄
Warning!
G
Window cleaning
!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the
wiper motor might suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
Fold the windshield wiper arms away
from the windshield to a vertical position only. They could otherwise damage the hood.
왘
왘
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
308
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass
surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
Turn on the wipers and place it in a vertical position.
For information on placing the wipers in a
vertical position, see “Replacing wiper
blades” (컄 page 370).
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper
motor might suddenly turn on and cause injury.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Operation
Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Seat belts
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
(80°C) or in direct sunlight.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.
Follow the instructions on the container.
i
Use only acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid could lead to corrosion.
Instrument cluster
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Warning!
G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Headliner and shelf below rear window
Clean with a soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
309
Operation
Vehicle care
Leather upholstery
!
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that has the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Do not use Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care or any solvents to clean
nubuck leather upholstery.
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leather upholstery.
MB Tex upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Nubuck leather upholstery (E 55 AMG)
The nubuck leather upholstery is treated
with a protective coating. Wipe nubuck
leather upholstery with damp microfiber
cloth to remove dust and other light stains.
Carefully dab nubuck leather upholstery
with a microfiber cloth to remove oil stains.
310
Wood trims
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
311
Practical hints
What to do if …
왔 What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
come on during the bulb self-check when
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2, have it checked and replaced
if necessary.
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
-
The yellow ABS malfunction
warning lamp comes on while
driving.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
switched off (see messages in display).
reducing steering capability.
The SBC brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Have the system checked at an authomally but without the ABS available.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as the Parktronic system*, Failure to follow these instructions inDistronic*, or the automatic transmission
creases the risk of an accident.
may also be malfunctioning.
왘 Read and observe messages in the
display (컄 page 321).
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The ABS has switched off.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
왘
312
If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
v
The yellow ABS/ESP warning
lamp comes on while driving.
The ESP is deactivated. Risk of accident!
왘 Turn the ESP back on (컄 page 85).
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailIf the ESP cannot be turned back on, have
ing road conditions.
the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
v
The yellow ABS/ESP warning
lamp flashes while driving.
The ABS, ESP or traction control has come 왘 When driving off, apply as little throtinto operation because of detected traction
tle as possible.
loss in at least one tire. Distronic* is deacti왘 While driving, ease up on the accelervated.
ator.
Distronic* is switched off.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘
Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: (컄 page 85).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents.
313
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
3
;
Possible cause
(Canada only)
(USA only)
The red brake warning lamp
You are driving with the parking brake set.
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
314
Suggested solution
앫
There is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system.
앫
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
왘
Release the parking brake.
왘
Observe the additional message in
the display.
왘
Risk of accident! Do not drive any further. Consult a Mercedes-Benz
Service Center. Under no circumstances should you top up the brake
fluid. This will not solve the problem.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
?
Possible cause
Suggested solution
왘
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the parking brake.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
왘
Check the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty.
왘
After refuelling, start the engine three
or four times in succession.
The yellow “CHECK ENGINE” mal- There is a malfunction in:
function indicator lamp comes on
앫 The fuel management system
while driving.
앫 The ignition system
앫
The emission control system
앫
Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
315
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
D
Possible cause
The red coolant warning lamp
comes on when the engine is
running.
Suggested solution
There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Immediately add coolant to prevent
engine from overheating
(컄 page 287).
If this warning lamp comes on frequently,
there is a leak in the cooling system.
왘
Have the cooling system checked.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric ra- 왘 If the coolant temperature is below
diator fan may be broken.
257°F (125°C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
D
The red coolant warning lamp
The coolant temperature has exceeded
comes on while driving and you 257°F (125°C).
hear a warning sound.
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
316
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
왘
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
왘
Stop as soon as possible and allow
the engine and coolant to cool down.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
l
The red DTR warning lamp
comes on while driving.
l
The red DTR warning lamp
앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
comes on while driving and you
ahead of you.
hear a warning chime sound.
앫 The distance warning system has recog- 왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
You may need to brake or maneuver
nized a stationary obstacle on your probto avoid hitting an obstacle.
able line of travel.
W
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp comes on while
driving.
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
<
The red seat belt telltale illuminates briefly and a warning
chime sounds after starting the
engine.
The telltale reminds you to fasten seat belts. 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
You are too close to the vehicle in front of you 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to into maintain selected speed.
crease the following distance.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 280).
317
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
1
Possible cause
The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
318
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in the restraint sys왘 Drive with added caution to the neartems. The air bags or emergency tensioning
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cendevices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
ter.
fail to activate in an accident.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
PASS AIR BAG OFF
The system is malfunctioning
왘
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Also note any messages in the
multifunction display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 350).
The indicator lamp illuminates and remains
illuminated with the weight of a typical adult
or someone larger than a small individual on
the front passenger seat.
Warning!
G
If the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the weight of a
typical adult or someone larger than a small
individual on the front passenger seat, do
not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
319
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause
PASS AIR BAG OFF
The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure that there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child
seat.
The indicator lamp does not illuminate
and/or does not remain illuminated with
the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in
a standard child restraint or less on the
front passenger seat.
Warning!
G
If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
does not illuminate or remains out with the
320
Suggested solution
왘
Make sure that no objects applying supplemental
weight onto the seat are present.
왘
Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head
restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system
may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
왘
If the light remains out, have the system checked as
soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘
Also note any messages in the multifunction display
and follow corrective steps (컄 page 350).
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on the front
passenger seat, do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Messages in the display
Warning!
The control system shows warning and
malfunction messages in the multifunction
display.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in
the control system (컄 page 134) displays
both cleared and uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button.
Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (컄 page 22) and are
then stored in the malfunction message
memory (컄 page 142).
G
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.
Warning!
G
i
Turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 2, or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice
to position 2 causes all lamps as well
as the multifunction display to come
on. Make sure that they are all in working order before starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may appear in the display. High priority messages
appear on a red background.
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
Contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
321
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ABS
Malfunction!
Visit workshop!
The ABS has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
and has switched off. The ESP and
Wheels will lock during hard braking, reducthe BAS are also deactivated. The
ing steering capability.
SBC brake system is still functioning
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
normally but without the ABS availMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
able.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
Display malfunction
Visit workshop!
The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
322
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Battery
Protection
Conven. Functions
Temporarily
Unavailable
The battery has insufficient voltage As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient,
and can no longer supply convethe consumers will switch on again.
nience functions such as the rear
window defroster.
Please Note:
Conven. Functions
Available Again
On-board voltage is sufficient; the
consumers will switch on again.
Cruise control
Visit workshop!
Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunctioning.
Distronic
External interference
Reactivate!
The Distronic* is switched off and is 왘 Try activating the Distronic* again later.
temporarily unavailable.
Visit workshop!
The Distronic* is malfunctioning or
the display is malfunctioning.
왘
왘
Have the cruise control or Distronic*
checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
323
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
Distronic
Currently unavailable
see oper. manual
DISTRONIC* is switched off if:
왘
If necessary, clean the DISTRONIC cover in
the area of the radiator grille.
앫
the DISTRONIC cover in the area
of the radiator grille is dirty
왘 Restart the vehicle.
앫
the functionality is impaired by
heavy rain or thick fog
or
DISTRONIC* becomes operational again without the engine being restarted when:
앫
dirt on the grille falls off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
앫
the system recognizes full sensor availability (due to lessening rain or the road surface
drying)
앫
the message in the multifunction display
disappears
앫
the speed last stored flashes in the display
for five seconds.
You can operate DISTRONIC* as usual again.
324
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ESP
Malfunction!
Visit workshop!
The ESP has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
and switched off.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
The SBC brake system is still funcMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
tioning normally. The ABS may still
Failure to follow these instructions increases
be operational.
the risk of an accident.
not available!
See Operator’s Manual
The ESP is deactivated because of a 왘 Synchronize the ESP. With the vehicle stamalfunction or interrupted power
tionary, turn the steering wheel completely
supply.
to the left and then to the right to synchronize the ESP.
The SBC brake system is still functioning normally.
If the ESP message does not go out:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
!
When synchronizing the ESP, make
sure you can turn the steering wheel in
both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects, e.g.
a road curb.
325
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ESP
Display malfunction
Visit workshop!
The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
P
Gear selector lever in P You have attempted to turn off the
왘
Place the gear selector lever in position P.
engine with the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button with the gear selector lever not in P.
You have opened the driver's door
with the gear selector lever not in P.
P/N
326
Shift to N or P
You have attempted to start the en- 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P
gine with the KEYLESS-GO*
or N. Make sure the brake pedal is destart/stop button while the gear sepressed.
lector lever was in position R or D.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol
#
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Undervoltage
Switch off
consumers
The battery has insufficient voltage.
왘
Turn off unnecessary electrical consumers.
Visit workshop!
The battery was charged with a battery
charger or jump started.
왘
Have the battery checked at a service
station.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
왘
Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
앫
alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
앫
broken poly-V-belt
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability.
Considerably greater brake pedal force is
required and the stopping distance is in- If it is intact:
creased.
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
327
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
#
(
328
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Battery/Alternator
Stop vehicle!
The battery is malfunctioning.
왘
Undervoltage
Charge battery
The battery has insufficient voltage.
Malfunction
Electrical consumers
switched off
The consumer battery has insufficient
The electrical consumers will come back
voltage and can no longer supply the con- online as soon as on-board voltage is sufvenience functions such as seat ventila- ficient.
tion*.
Backrest rear right
not locked
The rear seat backrest is not engaged.
왘
Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is
fully engaged in position.
Backrest rear left
not locked
The rear seat backrest is not engaged.
왘
Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is
fully engaged in position.
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.
The SBC brake system requires electrical
energy and therefore has only limited operation. Considerably greater brake pedal
force is required and the stopping dis왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tance is increased.
Center.
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 43).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
2
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Brake wear
Visit workshop!
The brake pads have reached their wear 왘 Brake pad thickness must be visually
limit.
inspected at the intervals specified in
the Service Booklet.
왘
T
Except Canada:
;
Canada only:
3
Have the brake pads replaced as soon
as possible.
Brake malfunction
Stop vehicle
The SBC brake system is in the emergen- 왘 Do not drive any further.
cy operation mode. Considerably greater
왘 Stop the vehicle and notify an authobrake pedal force is required and the
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
stopping distance is increased.
왘 Significantly greater force must be apDo not exceed a speed of 55 mph
plied to the brake pedal.
(90 km/h).
왘 Call for Roadside Assistance.
Reduced
braking effect
Start engine!
The battery has insufficient voltage and
cannot supply sufficient power to the
SBC brake system.
왘
Start the engine.
The message disappears when sufficient voltage is available
Longer
stopping dist.
Start engine!
329
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Except Canada:
Reduced
braking effect
Visit workshop!
The SBC brake system is in emergency 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
operation mode. Considerable brake ped왘 Adjust driving to be consistent with
al force is required and the stopping disreduced braking responsiveness.
tance is increased.
;
Canada only:
3
Longer
stopping dist.
Visit workshop!
왘
Service brake!
Visit workshop!
There are malfunctions, but the SBC
brake system is operating normally.
Brake overheated!
Drive carefully!
The brake system is overheated due to an 왘 Relieve the load on the brake system.
excessive load on the brakes.
왘 Drive more smoothly and think ahead
to avoid unnecessary braking.
Release
park. brake!
330
Possible solution
You are driving with the parking brake
set.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
왘
When driving down slopes, shift into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking
power (컄 page 163).
왘
Cautiously continue driving so that
the air stream will cool down the
brakes.
왘
Release the parking brake
(컄 page 45).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Except Canada:
Brake fluid
Visit workshop!
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.
왘
;
Canada only:
3
Warning!
G
Driving while these messages are displayed
can result in an accident. Have your brake
system checked immediately.
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 385).
Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and
notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.
Don’t add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
If the SBC brake system enters its emergency operation mode, the driver must apply
significantly greater brake pedal pressure
and depress the pedal much further than
normal to obtain braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal.
Brakes may only be applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
i
Low brake fluid in the reservoir may cause
the braking system to fail!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
inspected by a qualified technician at
the intervals specified in the Service
Booklet.
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
!
331
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
?
Visit workshop!
There may be a malfunction in the:
왘
Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Add coolant (컄 page 287).
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
B
Warning!
fuel injection system
앫
ignition system
앫
exhaust system
앫
fuel system
The coolant level is too low.
Coolant
Check level
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
332
앫
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing major engine damage.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Ï
Warning!
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Coolant
Stop, engine off!
The coolant is too hot.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
During severe operation conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
!
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
333
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Ï
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Coolant
Stop, engine off!
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
왘
Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘
Coolant
Visit workshop!
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc- 왘 Observe the coolant temperature distioning.
play.
왘
334
Do not continue to drive the vehicle
with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Warranty.
Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
G
Display malfunction
The instrument cluster display is malfunc- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
tioning.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Display malfunction
Visit workshop!
The displays for several systems have
malfunctioned. Some systems themselves may also have malfunctioned.
Display malfunction
Visit workshop!
Certain electronic systems are unable to 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
relay information to the control system.
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz CenThe following systems may have failed:
ter.
±
J
Door open
앫
Coolant temperature display
앫
Tachometer
앫
Cruise control display
You are attempting to drive with one or
more doors open.
Possible solution
왘
왘
Have the electronic systems checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Close the doors.
335
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
:
USA only:
The engine oil level is too low.
왘
Add engine oil (컄 page 286) and
check the engine oil level
(컄 page 285).
There is no oil in the engine. There is a
danger of engine damage.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
soon as possible.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Add engine oil (컄 page 286) and
check the engine oil level
(컄 page 285).
Add 1 Qt. engine oil
at next refueling
Canada only:
Add 1 Liter engine oil
at next refueling
Engine oil level
Stop, engine off!
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level!
336
You have added too much engine oil.
왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off. ObThere is a risk of damaging the engine or
serve all legal requirements with rethe catalytic converter.
spect to its disposal.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
:
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Engine oil
Visit workshop!
The engine oil has dropped to a critical
level.
왘
Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 285) and add oil as required
(컄 page 286).
왘
If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
It may be that there is water in the engine 왘 Have the engine oil checked.
oil.
Engine oil level
Visit workshop!
When the Engine oil - Visit workshop!
message appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately
the minimum level.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive
to the nearest service station where the
engine oil should be topped to the required
level with an approved oil.
!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in
serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
337
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
A
Reserve fuel
The fuel level has dropped below the re- 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
serve mark.
(컄 page 280).
Hood open!
You are driving with the hood open.
Key
Check battery!
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batter- 왘 Change the batteries (컄 page 361).
ies are discharged.
Key
not recognized!
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not
recognized while the engine is running
because
Y
F
앫
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
not in the vehicle
앫
there is strong radio-frequency interference
Possible solution
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 283).
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
왘
Search for the SmartKey.
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be
started again after the engine is
stopped.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo- 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey
mentarily not recognized.
in the vehicle.
왘
338
Operate the vehicle with the
SmartKey in the starter switch if necessary.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
F
Key detected
in vehicle!
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the 왘 Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
vehicle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
Keyless go
Check system
The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
ing.
Center as soon as possible.
Key
Do not forget key
This display appears (for a maximum of 왘 Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened
왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYwith the engine shut off and no SmartKey
LESS-GO* with you when leaving the
in the starter switch.
vehicle.
This message is only a reminder.
Remove key!
You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Replace key
There is no additional code available for
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
339
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
.
340
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Brake light
Visit workshop!
Brake lamp illumination is delayed or
lamp is permanently on.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Brake light, left
Back-up light on!
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A
backup bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Brake light, right
Back-up light on!
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
backup bulb is being used.
Center as soon as possible.
Display malfunction
Visit workshop!
The display for the lamps or the system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning.
Center as soon as possible.
Front foglight,
left
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Front foglight,
right
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Headlt. cornering
The Bi-Xenon cornering lamps system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning.
Center as soon as possible.
Headlt. cornering
Back- up light on
The Bi-Xenon cornering lamps system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning. Another light is being
Center as soon as possible.
used.
Headlt. cornering
malfunction
Visit workshop!
The Bi-Xenon cornering lamps system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning.
Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
.
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
High beam,
left
The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
High beam,
right
The right high beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.
License plate lamp,
left
The left license plate lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.
License plate lamp,
right
The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Lamp sensor
Visit workshop!
The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.
왘
In the control system, set lamp operation to manual mode (컄 page 151).
왘
Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch.
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Low beam, left
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Low beam, right
The right low beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
ing.
Center as soon as possible.
341
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
.
Marker light,
front left
The front left side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Marker light
front right
The front right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Park. light, front left The left parking lamps are malfunctionBack-up light on!
ing. A backup bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Park. light, front right The right parking lamps are malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Back-up light on!
ing. A backup bulb is being used.
Center as soon as possible.
342
Rear foglight
Back-up light on!
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. A
backup bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Reverse light, left
The left reverse light is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Reverse light, right
The right backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Switch off lights!
Lamps have been turned on although the 왘 Switch off the headlights.
SmartKey in the starter switch is in position 0.
Tail light, left
Back-up light on!
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
backup bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Tail light, right
Back-up light on!
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
backup bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
.
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Turn signal, rear left
Back-up light on!
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning. A backup bulb is being used.
Turn signal, rear right The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Back-up light on!
tioning. A backup bulb is being used.
H
Turn sig., front left
Back-up light on!
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning. A backup bulb is being used.
Turn sig., front right
Back-up light on!
The right front turn signal lamp is mal왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
functioning. A backup bulb is being used.
Turn sig.,
left mirror
The left turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Turn sig.,
right mirror
The right turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
malfunctioning. This message will only
possible.
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Tire pres. monitor
activated!
The tire pressure is being checked.
Tire pres. monitor
Reactivate
The tire inflation pressure monitor* is de- 왘 Activate the tire inflation pressure
activated.
monitor* (컄 page 294).
왘
Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
possible.
343
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
H
Tire pres. monitor
not activated!
The tire inflation pressure monitor* is un- 왘 Check the tire pressure at the next
able to monitor the tire pressure due to
service station.
앫
the presence of several wheel sensors
in the vehicle.
앫
excessive wheel sensor temperatures.
앫
a nearby radio interference source.
앫
unrecognized wheel sensors mounted.
Tire pressure
The tire pressure is being checked.
display after driv. a
few mins. Reactivate using R button
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
344
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Possible solution
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
H
Tire pres. monitor
Visit workshop!
The tire inflation pressure monitor is mal- 왘 Have the tire inflation pressure monifunctioning.
tor checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
A wheel without proper sensor was installed.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
Tire pres.
Caution, tire defect!
The tire pressure has decreased significantly in one or more tires.
왘
Check and correct tire pressure as required (컄 page 292).
Tire pres.
Caution, tire defect
One or more tires is deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrubt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrubt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
already below the minimum value.
Tire pres.
Check tires!
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
low.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Possible solution
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
345
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
H
Tire pres. RL
Caution
Tire defect
The left rear tire is deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrubt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
The left rear tire pressure is low.
Tire pres. RL
Check tires!
The right rear tire is deflating.
Tire pres. RR
Caution
Tire defect
The right rear tire pressure is low.
Tire pres. RR
Check tires!
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
346
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
H
Tire pres. FL
Caution
Tire defect
The left front tire is deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrubt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
The right rear tire pressure is low.
Tire pres. FL
Check tires!
The right front tire is deflating.
Tire pres. FR
Caution
Tire defect
The right front tire pressure is low.
Tire pres. FR
Check tires!
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
347
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
<
9
K
J
348
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Seat belt system
Visit workshop!
The seat belt system is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Service memory full
See Operator’s Manual
The FSS Plus service memory cannot
save any more data.
왘
Have the service memory checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Close
Sunroof
You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the sliding/pop-up roof
the SmartKey removed from the starter
(컄 page 206).
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
Close
Sunroof
You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the sliding/pop-up roof
the SmartKey removed from the starter
(컄 page 206).
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
L
Tele Aid defective
Visit workshop!
One or more main functions of the Tele
Aid system are malfunctioning.
왘
Tele Aid battery
Visit workshop!
The emergency power battery for the Tele 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by
Aid system is malfunctioning. If the vehian authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
cle battery is also dead, Tele Aid will not
be operational.
Restraint system
malfunction
Visit workshop!
The system is malfunctioning.
1
Warning!
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
왘
Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Center immediately to have the system
checked; otherwise the SRS may not be
activated when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
349
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag activated
see Oper.’s Man.
Air bag is activated while
driving even though a child,
small individual, or object
below the system's weight
threshold is on the front
passenger seat, or the
front passenger seat is
empty. Objects on the seat
or forces acting on the seat
may make the system
sense supplemental
weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible
and check the following:
왘
Make sure that there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child
seat.
왘
Make sure that no objects applying supplemental
weight onto the seat are present.
왘
Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head
restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system
may recognize such forces as supplemental weight
and sense that an occupant on the front passenger
seat is of a heavier weight than actually present.
(Continued on next page)
350
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Front passenger
airbag activated
see Oper.’s Man.
Possible cause
Possible solution
If performing any of the above corrective steps is successful, the message Front passenger airbag deactivated will appear in the multifunction display,
confirming the situation has been remedied. Note that
after performing the corrective steps, it may take up to
60 seconds for the message Front passenger airbag
deactivated to appear.
If the message Front passenger airbag activated
remains on in the multifunction display and/or the
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains out even
after performing the above corrective steps, have the
system checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the message Front passenger airbag
activated remains on in the multifunction
display and/or the PASS AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not
have any children12 years old and under
and other small individuals use the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
351
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag deactivated
see Oper.’s Man.
Air bag is deactivated while
driving even though an
adult or someone larger
than a small individual is
occupying the front passenger seat. Forces acting
on the seat may make the
system sense a decrease
in weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible
and check the following:
왘
Do not lean on armrests or lift yourself up using handle over the door.
왘
Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 35).
왘
Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind or around the
seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense
that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually
present is on the front passenger seat.
왘
Re-position yourself.
왘
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with
your back against the seat backrest.
If performing any of the above corrective steps is
successful, the message Front passenger airbag
activated will appear in the multifunction display,
confirming the situation has been remedied.
(Continued on next page)
352
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Front passenger
airbag deactivated
see Oper.’s Man.
Possible cause
Possible solution
Note that after performing the corrective steps, it may
take up to 60 seconds for the message Front passenger airbag activated to appear.
If the message Front passenger airbag deactivated
remains on in the multifunction display and/or the
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains on even after
performing the above corrective steps, have the system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
Warning!
G
If the message Front passenger airbag
deactivated remains on in the multifunction display and/or the PASS AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp remains illuminated even after performing the above corrective steps,
do not have any passenger use the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
353
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
t
Ê
W
354
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
Function
Not available!
This display appears if button t or
s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
Trunk open!
This message will appear whenever the
trunk lid is open.
Washer fluid
Check level!
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 289).
of total reservoir capacity.
왘
Close the trunk lid.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause
Possible solution
@
Vehicle rising!
Your vehicle is adjusting to your level selection.
Level selec. canceled
The “Raised” level setting is canceled at 왘 Reactivate the “Raised” level setting.
vehicle speeds of over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Stop, car too low!
The vehicle level control is malfunctioning.
Avoid excessive steering input. The fender or tires could otherwise be damaged.
Listen for scraping noises.
Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘
Drive to the side of the road and select a higher vehicle level. Depending
on the type of malfunction, this may
raise the vehicle’s level.
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
Visit workshop!
The system is functional only to a limited 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph
extent.
(80 km/h).
The system display or the system is mal- 왘 Have the vehicle checked at an authofunctioning.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
355
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
왔 Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
Spare wheel
The first aid kit is in the storage compartment at the front edge of the front passenger seat.
The spare wheel is located under the trunk
floor.
왘
Lift the trunk floor and engage the handle in the upper edge of trunk.
왘
Remove the luggage box (컄 page 357).
Removing the spare wheel
왘
Turn luggage bowl counterclockwise.
왘
Remove spare wheel 2.
Storing the spare wheel
왘
Place spare wheel 2 in wheel well.
왘
Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop
to secure the spare wheel.
!
Always lower trunk floor before closing
trunk lid.
i
1 Tab
왘
Pull tab 1 upward.
왘
Fold the covering forward.
왘
Remove the first aid kit.
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
356
1 Vehicle tool kit
Wheel bolt wrench and Jack
2 Spare wheel
3 Luggage bowl
Vehicles with collapsible tire:
The electrical air pump is located under
luggage bowl 3.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the spare wheel
(Minispare wheel or collapsible tire) are different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted.
The spare wheel should only be used temporarily, and replaced with a regular road
wheel as quickly as possible.
In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the spare wheel when observing
the following restrictions:
앫
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
앫
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.
앫
Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Luggage box
Remove luggage box
More information, see “Spare wheel”
(컄 page 402).
1 Fastening clip
2 Luggage box
왘
Turn fastening clips 1 to the left upwards from fastening bolts.
왘
Lift luggage box in the area of the fastening bolts and remove it from trunk.
357
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Install luggage box
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor
(컄 page 356).
The vehicle tool kit includes:
왘
Insert luggage box into trunk so that
fastening clips are in line with fastening
bolts.
왘
Push front edge of luggage box in direction of arrow under cover of trunk sill.
왘
Press fastening clips onto fastening
bolts until they lock into place.
358
앫
One pair of universal pliers
앫
One towing eye bolt
앫
One wheel wrench
앫
One alignment bolt
앫
One fuse extractor
앫
Spare fuses
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the driver’s door
Unlocking the vehicle
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, open the driver’s door and
the trunk using the mechanical key.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 33).
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
왘
Move locking tab 1 in the direction of
the arrow and slide mechanical key 2
out of the housing.
3 Unlocking
4 Locking
왘
Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left.
359
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk
왘
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
If you are unable to unlock the trunk with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the
trunk with the mechanical key.
The handle is located above the rear license plate recess.
왘
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1 and hold it in this
position.
Pull trunk lid handle 2 and lift the
trunk lid.
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock.
360
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical
key as follows:
왘
Close the passenger doors and the
trunk.
왘
Press the central locking switch in the
cockpit (컄 page 111).
왘
Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:
Check to see whether the locking
knobs on the passenger doors are still
visible. If necessary, push them down
manually.
왘
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
SmartKey.
왘
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key (컄 page 360).
왘
Check if the trunk is locked.
!
Always make sure there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
i
1 Unlocking in an emergency
2 Handle
Locking the vehicle
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
Grasp the outside door handle.
앫
Press the start/stop button.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Changing batteries in the SmartKey/
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
SmartKey
i
When changing batteries, always replace both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G
왘
Remove mechanical key 1
(컄 page 359).
왘
Insert the mechanical key in side opening and push gray slide.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
왘
Pull the battery compartment out of the
SmartKey housing in direction of arrow.
왘
Remove the batteries.
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
3 Battery
4 Contact spring
361
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries under the contact spring with the
plus (+) side facing up.
왘
Pull the battery compartment out of the
SmartKey housing in direction of arrow.
왘
Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place.
왘
Using mechanical key 3 apply pressure to position 2.
Battery 1 tilts up slightly.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
i
When changing batteries, always replace both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
1 Battery
2 Tilt battery up
3 Mechanical key
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
Remove mechanical key (컄 page 359).
왘
Insert the mechanical key in side opening and push grey slide.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
362
왘
Pull out batteries 1 in direction of arrow.
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries with the plus (+) side facing up.
왘
Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Fuel filler flap emergency release
In case the central locking system does
not release the fuel filler flap, you can open
it manually.
Manually unlocking the transmission
selector lever
In the case of power failure, the transmission selector lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
왘
Open the storage compartment in the
center console (컄 page 247).
왘
Take out the cup holder*.
Using two fingers in the horizontal slot
at the upper rear side of the cup holder,
lift cup holder upwards to remove.
왘
Hold the cover at a 45° angle.
왘
Insert a suitable object 1 (e.g. a pin)
through the hole and press the pin
downward.
왘
Remove pin 1.
i
1 Release knob
왘
Open trunk lid.
왘
Remove right-side tail trim.
왘
Turn release knob 1 clockwise (arrow).
1 Pin
The selector lever is locked again when
moving it to position P.
The fuel filler flap can know be opened.
363
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
왘
Sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof*
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up
roof or panorama sliding/pop-up roof
manually should an electrical malfunction
occur.
i
Do not disconnect the electrical connectors.
왘
Fold screen 1 down.
364
앫
slide roof open
앫
lower roof at the rear
The sliding/pop-up roof or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchronized after being operated manually
(컄 page 208).
The sliding/pop-up roof or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof drive is located behind lens 1 of the interior overhead light.
1 Screen
Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
왘
Obtain crank 2.
왘
Insert crank 2 through hole 1.
왘
Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
앫
Slide roof closed
앫
Raise roof at the rear
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
앫
Tail lamps
LED
2 Turn signal lamp
1156 NA
3 Side marker lamp
W5W
4 Halogen headlamps:
Low beam
H7 (55 W)
5 Halogen headlamps:
High beam/high beam H7 (55 W)
flasher
Backup bulbs will be brought into use
when the following lamps malfunction:
Standing lamps
1 Additional turn signal
lamps
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
Low and high beam1
D2S-35 W
i
앫
Type
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
High beam flasher
H7 (55 W)
Parking and standing
lamps
6 Fog lamp
1
W5W
H1 (55 W)
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps* do not replace
the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself.
365
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps
Lamp
7 High mounted brake
lamp
Notes on bulb replacement
Type
G
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
8 Brake, tail, parking,
HiP
standing, backup lamps LED*
and turn signal lamps.
Rear fog lamp (driver's
side).
9 License plate lamps
Warning!
LED
C5W
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
drop the bulb
앫
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon* lamps,
it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
366
앫
Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center:
앫
Additional turn signal lamps in the
exterior rear view mirrors
앫
High mounted brake lamp
앫
Bi-Xenon* lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
앫
Rear lamps
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Bi-Xenon* headlamps
Warning!
Low beam halogen bulb
G
Do not remove the cover 4 for the Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage in
Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components.
We recommend that you have such work
done by a qualified technician.
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 High beam halogen bulb
3 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp
4 Cover for Bi-Xenon* (low beam and
high beam) or halogen (low beam)
headlamp
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 283).
왘
Turn the locking mechanism counterclockwise and remove headlamp
cover 4.
왘
Pull electrical connector off.
왘
Release the retaining springs and take
out the bulb.
왘
Insert the new bulb in the socket so
that the base is in the recess on the
lower left.
왘
Attach the retaining springs.
왘
Insert connector into the bulb.
왘
Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
367
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam halogen bulb
Front turn signal lamp bulb
Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 283).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 283).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 283).
왘
Press the clamp and remove headlamp
cover.
왘
Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘
Press the clamp and remove headlamp
cover.
왘
Pull electrical connector off.
왘
왘
왘
Turn the locking mechanism counterclockwise and take out the high beam
bulb 2.
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
Pull out the bulb socket 3 with the
bulb.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
왘
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘
Insert a new bulb in the socket.
왘
Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist
clockwise.
왘
Reinstall the bulb socket.
왘
Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
왘
Insert the new bulb in the socket so
that the base is in the recess on the
lower left.
왘
Attach the retaining springs.
왘
Insert connector into the bulb.
왘
Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
368
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Side marker lamp bulb
License plate lamp
!
To prevent scratches, we recommend
that you have the sidemarker bulb replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Carefully slide lamp towards front.
왘
Remove rear end first.
왘
Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘
Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket.
왘
Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
clockwise.
왘
To reinstall lamp, set rear end in
bumper and let front end snap into
place.
The tail lamps are equipped with HiP bulbs.
Warning!
G
The bulbs in the tail lamps cannot be replaced individually. The tail lamp bulbs are
under pressure and could explode during an
attempt to replace them.
If the tail lamps are malfunctioning, have
them exchanged at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Screw
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Loosen both screws 1 and remove
lamp.
왘
Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
lamp.
왘
Retighten the screws.
369
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
왔 Replacing wiper blades
!
To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper
arms should only be folded forward
when in the vertical position.
Removing wiper blades
왘
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 1.
왘
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 47).
왘
With wiper arm in the vertical position,
turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from
starter switch before replacing a wiper
blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
370
왘
Fold the wiper arm forward until it
snaps into place.
왘
Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
wiper arm.
왘
Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
the retainer.
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
!
왘
Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until
it locks in place.
Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.
왘
Rotate wiper blade into position parallel to wiper arm.
왘
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield. Make sure you hold on
to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
371
Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel and
the collapsible tire are different from those
of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle
handling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel mounted.
The spare wheel should only be used temporarily, and replaced with a regular road
wheel as quickly as possible.
In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the spare wheel when observing
the following restrictions:
앫
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
앫
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.
앫
Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
372
Preparing the vehicle
Mounting the spare wheel
왘
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.
Preparing the vehicle
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Prepare the vehicle as described under
“Preparing the vehicle” on this page.
왘
Engage the steering wheel lock in the
straight-ahead position and set the
parking brake.
왘
Move the selector lever to P.
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
왘
Take the spare wheel out of the trunk
(컄 page 356).
왘
Take the wheel wrench and the jack
out of the trunk (컄 page 358).
Lifting the vehicle
왘
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘
Place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.
Practical hints
Flat tire
When changing wheel on a hill:
왘
Place chocks on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the other axle.
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into either side of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housing and
in front of the rear wheel housing.
1 Jack take-up bracket
2 Jack
3 Crank
왘
왘
Position jack 2 on firm ground under
the respective jack take-up bracket 1.
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).
373
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
Removing the wheel
Position the jack only on the jack take-up
brackets designed for this purpose.
If the jack is not properly positioned, the vehicle may slip off of the jack.
Warning!
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
under the take-up bracket so that it is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from the
side, even if the vehicle is parked on an incline
왘
Turn crank 3 until the tire is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
Never start engine while vehicle is
raised.
G
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
for performing maintenance work under the
vehicle. Never lie down under the raised vehicle. Do not start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
1 Alignment bolt
왘
Unscrew the upper-most wheel bolt
and remove.
왘
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
왘
Remove the remaining bolts.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
왘
374
Remove the wheel.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel
Warning!
Warning!
G
Vehicles with collapsible tire:
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly mounted.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
pump (컄 page 376) before lowering the vehicle.
왘
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
왘
Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
왘
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Warning!
G
Use only genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identified by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts
may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident. Be
sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
왘
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
375
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted.
The spare wheel should only be used temporarily, and replaced with a regular road
wheel as quickly as possible.
In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the Minispare wheel when observing the following restrictions:
앫
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
앫
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.
앫
Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
376
Inflating the collapsible tire
!
Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the collapsible tire. Otherwise the
rim may be damaged.
왘
Take the electric air pump out of the
trunk (컄 page 356).
Warning!
G
Observe instructions on air pump label.
1 Flap
2 Air pump switch
3 Electrical plug
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
5 Union nut
왘
Open flap 1 on the air pump.
왘
Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
with pressure gauge 4.
왘
Make sure the vent screw on air hose is
closed.
왘
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
Screw air hose 4 onto the tire valve.
!
왘
Insert electrical plug 3 into vehicle cigar lighter socket.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the ignition to
position 1.
Do not operate the air pump longer
than eight minutes without interruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after it has cooled off.
or
왘
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever once
without depressing the brake pedal.
Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the ignition to
position 0.
Press I on electric air pump switch 2.
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the tire.
왘
왘
or
왘
Inflate the tire to approx. 51 psi
(3.5 bar).
This takes about five minutes for the
collapsible tire. Air hose 4 and union
nut 5 can become hot duration inflation. Exercise proper caution to avoid
burning yourself when using the equipment.
Press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
on the gear selector lever twice without
depressing the brake pedal.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.
왘
Warning!
G
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
왘
Detach the electric air pump.
왘
Stow electrical plug 3 and air hose 4
behind flap 1 and place the air pump
back in the trunk.
If the tire pressure is above 51 psi
(3.5 bar), release excess tire pressure
using the vent screw.
377
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle
왘
왘
Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.
Remove the jack.
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
왘
Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
should be fully collapsed.
i
Wrap the damaged wheel in the protective film that comes with the spare
wheel and put the wheel in the trunk.
1 - 5 Wheel bolts
왘
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
378
You can also place the damaged wheel
down into the spare wheel well. In this
case, you must stow the holder from
the spare wheel well in the trunk.
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor until the depressurized
tire is no longer in the vehicle.
Practical hints
Batteries
왔 Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
앫
Main battery (battery for starter and
electrical consumers; located in the
trunk).
앫
Auxiliary battery (back-up battery; stabilizes the electrical system if the main
battery is discharged; located in the engine compartment)
The main battery is in the trunk under the
luggage box. Remove the luggage box
(컄 page 357).
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 288).
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Vehicles with spare wheel
1 Negative terminal
2 Positive terminal
Warning!
G
Jump starting must only be done using the
main battery in the trunk.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
379
Practical hints
Batteries
!
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Service Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
Warning!
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Warning!
G
Disconnecting the battery
The SBC brake system requires electrical
power to operate.
Warning!
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. The same applies if
battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to
the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adjust your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to “The SBC
brake system” (컄 page 85).
With a disconnected battery
앫
you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever will
have no effect
앫
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
왘
Depress parking brake firmly or move
gear selector lever to position P.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
왘
380
G
왘
Press the start/stop button until
the engine shuts off.
왘
Open the driver’s door.
Open the trunk.
Practical hints
Batteries
왘
Remove the luggage box (컄 page 357).
왘
Disconnect battery negative lead 1.
왘
Remove cover 2 from the positive terminal.
왘
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
왘
왘
Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in reverse order.
i
The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnection):
앫
Set the clock (컄 page 148)
(see COMAND operator’s manual).
앫
Resynchronize the ESP
(컄 page 325).
Removing the battery
Reconnecting the battery
왘
Remove the screw-nuts securing the
battery.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Remove the battery bracket.
Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover.
앫
왘
Resynchronize the side windows
(컄 page 204).
왘
Take out the battery.
왘
Connect the negative lead.
앫
Resynchronize the sliding/pop-up
roof* (컄 page 208) or the panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
(컄 page 213).
!
Charging and reinstalling the battery
Never invert the terminal connections!
Warning!
G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
왘
Install the luggage box (컄 page 357).
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
381
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
382
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
앫
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
앫
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫
Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫
Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
parts that move when the engine is
started or running.
!
Jump starting may only be performed
on the main battery installed in the
trunk.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 288).
The battery is located in the trunk underneath the luggage box (컄 page 357). Only
jump start the vehicle from the battery in
the trunk.
왘
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Apply parking brake.
왘
Shift gear selector lever to position P.
왘
Connect positive terminals 1 and 3
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 3
first.
!
Never invert the terminal connections!
1 Positive terminal of discharged battery
2 Negative terminal of discharged battery
3 Positive terminal of charged battery
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
383
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘
Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘
Connect negative terminals 4 and 2
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 4
first.
왘
Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
i
The message Malfunction - electric
consumers switched off may appear
in the instrument cluster. It will disappear as soon as the battery is sufficiently charged.
384
Now you can again turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
왘
Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 2 and 4 and then
from positive terminals 1 and 3.
Now you can turn on the lights.
왘
Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm and the
automatic central locking
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised (except vehicles with 4MATIC) only so far as necessary
to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing
methods can be employed.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC:
Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing
so could damage the transfer case,
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
All wheels must be on or off the ground.
Observe instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
with 4MATIC), the engine must be shut
off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1). Otherwise the ESP will
immediately be engaged and will apply
the rear wheel brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
be in position N and the SmartKey
must be in starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
385
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the drive train, however, we
recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange (vehicles with 4MATIC: disconnected at
the front and rear axle drive flanges) for
any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.
Warning!
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system
앫
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.
386
Warning!
G
The brake system requires electrical power
to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to
the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adapt your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to “SBC brake
system” (컄 page 85).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the steering system. In
this case, it is important to keep in mind that
a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i
!
i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner – only the
selected turn signal will operate.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the following:
The selector lever will remain locked in
position P and the SmartKey will not
turn in the starter switch if the battery
is disconnected or discharged. See
notes on the battery (컄 page 379) or
on jump starting (컄 page 382).
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button in position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel
as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Manual unlocking transmission selector lever (컄 page 363).
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 90).
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic central locking (컄 page 111).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
387
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
Front of vehicle
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).
왘
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘
Fit cover and snap into place.
Rear of vehicle
To remove cover:
왘
Pull cover in the direction of the arrow.
왘
Fold cover down to reveal threaded
hole for the towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).
왘
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
To remove cover:
왘
Press mark on cover in direction of arrow.
왘
Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for
towing eye bolt.
388
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper
Fit cover and snap into place.
Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
i
Opening
Fuse chart
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rating.
왘
Pull cover 1 open with a screwdriver
or similar tool.
왘
Remove cover 1 rearward.
The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in
the passenger compartment. The amperages of the fuses are also given there.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Closing
왘
Attach cover 1 in the front.
왘
Fold cover 1 in until it engages.
Spare fuses
Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit
in the trunk.
Fuse extractor
Fuse box in passenger compartment
The fuse extractor is found in the vehicle
tool kit in the trunk.
i
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rating.
2 Cover
3 Catches
1 Cover
왘
Turn catches 3 counter-clockwise
and remove cover 2.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
389
390
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Consumer information
391
Technical data
Spare parts service
왔 Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
392
!
The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information Booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Car Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories Warranties, copies of
which are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
393
Technical data
Identification labels
왔 Identification labels
1 Certification label
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
3 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission control system
4 Engine number (engraved on engine)
5 Emission control label
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
394
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
E 320/E 500
E 55 AMG
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
The E 55 AMG has two poly-V-belts (belt one
shown in purple/belt two shown in black).
1 Idler pulley
2 Automatic belt tensioner
3 Power steering pump
4 Air conditioning compressor
5 Crankshaft
6 Coolant pump
7 Generator (alternator)
8 Idler pulley
9 Automatic belt tensioner
a Super charger
395
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
E 320 (211.0651)
E 500 (211.0701)
E 320 4MATIC (211.0821)
E 500 4MATIC (211.0831)
Engine
112
113
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
6
8
Bore
3.54 in (89.90 mm)
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
Model
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm )
303.0 cu.in. (4966 cm3)
Compression ratio
10:1
10:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
221 hp/5600 rpm
(165 kW/5600 rpm)
302 hp/5600 rpm
(225 kW/5600 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
232 lb-ft/3000 rpm - 4800 rpm
(315 Nm/3000 rpm - 4800 rpm)
339 lb-ft/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm
(460 Nm/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6000 rpm
6000 rpm
Firing order
1-4-3-6-2-5
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2390 mm
2390 mm
1
3
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
396
Technical data
Engine
Model
E 55 AMG (211.0761)
Engine
113
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
Bore
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke
3.60 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
331.8 cu.in. (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio
9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
469 hp/6100 rpm
(350 kW/6100 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
516 lb-ft/2650 rpm
(700 Nm/2650 rpm - 4500 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6500 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belts
Belt one: 1289 mm
Belt two: 2449 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
397
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as:
앫
Poor handling characteristics
앫
Increased noise
앫
Increased fuel consumption
!
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. This may result in damage to the
tires or the vehicle.
398
i
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
pressure table is located on the fuel filler flap of the vehicle. The tire pressure
should be checked regularly and
should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Follow the tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with
the vehicle.
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
16’’ tires
E 320/E 320 4MATIC
Rims (light alloy)
8 J x 16
Wheel offset
1.4 in (36 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
-
All-season tires (radial-ply tires)
225/55 R16 95H M+S
Winter tires (radial-ply tires)
-
17’’ tires
E 320/E 500
(Appearance Package*)
E 500/E 500 4MATIC
E 320 4MATIC
E 500 4MATIC
(Appearance Package*)
Rims (light alloy)
8 J x 17
8 J x 17
8 J x 17
Wheel offset
1.5 in (38 mm)
1.5 in (38 mm)
1.5 in (38 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
245/45 R17 95W
-
-
All-season tires (radial-ply tires)
-
245/45 R17 95H M+S
245/45 R17 95H M+S
Winter tires (radial-ply tires)
245/45 R17 95H M+S
245/45 R17 95H M+S
245/45 R17 95H M+S
399
Technical data
Rims and tires
18’’ tires
E 55 AMG
E 320 4MATIC (Sport Package*)
E 500 4MATIC (Sport Package*)
AMG light alloy rims
8 J x 18
8 J x 18
Wheel offset
1.18 in (30 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
-
245/40 ZR18
or
245/40 R18 97Y XL or Extra Load
or
245/40 ZR18 97Y XL or Extra Load
All-season tires (radial-ply tires)
-
-
Winter tires (radial-ply tires)
245/40 R18 93H M+S
or
245/40 R18 97V XL or Extra Load M+S
400
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
E 55 AMG
E 320 (Sport Package*)
E 500 (Sport Package*)
Front axle: AMG light alloy rims
Rear axle:
1
8 J x 18
Wheel offset
1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
245/40 ZR18
AMG light alloy rims
9 J x 18
Wheel offset
1.54 in (39 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
265/35 ZR18 XL or Extra Load M01
Must not be used with snow chains
401
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
i
Please note that the tire pressure of the
Minispare and the collapsible tire differs from the tire pressure of the road
tires.
Make sure the Minispare wheel is inflated to approx. 61 psi (4.2 bar).
Inflate the collapsible tire (컄 page 376)
to approximately 51 psi (3.5 bar).
402
Minispare wheel (except E 55 AMG)
Collapsible tire (E 55 AMG only)
Rim
4 J x 17
Rim
6 B x 18
Wheel offset
1.34 (34 mm)
Wheel offset
0.98 (25 mm)
Tire
175/55-18 95P1
Tire
1
T 155/70 R17 110 M
Must not be used with snow chains.
1
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
Technical data
Electrical system
왔 Electrical system
Model
E 320/E 320 4MATIC
E 500/E 500 4MATIC
E 55 AMG
Generator (alternator)
14 V/150 A
14 V/150 A
14 V/180 A
Starter motor
14 V/1.4 kW
14 V/1.7 kW
14 V/1.7 kW
Battery (auxiliary)
12 V/12 Ah
12 V/12 Ah
12 V/12 Ah
Battery (main)
12 V/95 Ah
12 V/95 Ah
12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs
Bosch F8 DPP 332U
NGK PFR 5R-11
Bosch F8 DPP 332U
NGK PFR 5R-11
NGK IL FR 6 A
Electrode gap
0.039 in (1.00 mm)
0.039 in (1.00 mm)
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque
18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
403
Technical data
Main dimensions
왔 Main dimensions
Model
E 320/E 320 4MATIC
E 500/E 500 4MATIC
E 55 AMG
Overall vehicle length
190.3 in (4833 mm)
190.3 in (4833 mm)
190.9 in (4849 mm)
Overall vehicle width
71.7 in (1822 mm)
71.7 in (1822 mm)
71.7 in (1822 mm)
Overall vehicle height
57.1 in (1449 mm)
Overall vehicle height (Airmatic DC*) 56.2 in (1429 mm)
(optional on E320; standard on
E500/E55 AMG)
56.3 in (1431 mm)
55.6 in (1412 mm)
Wheelbase
112.4 in (2854 mm)
112.4 in (2854 mm)
112.4 in (2854 mm)
Track, front
61.4 in (1559 mm)
61.7 in (1567 mm)
62.3 in (1583 mm)
Track, rear
61.1 in (1552 mm)
61.4 in (1560 mm)
61.3 in (1558 mm)
404
Technical data
Weights
왔 Weights
Roof load max.
220 lbs (100 kg)
Trunk load max.
220 lbs (100 kg)
405
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities
Engine with oil filter
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
brands tested and approved by us.
Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products Pamphlet, or inquire at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
E 320 / E 320 4MATIC
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Approved engine oils
E 500 / E 500 4MATIC
8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
E 55 AMG
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Automatic transmission
8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Oil
Front axle
E 320 4MATIC /
E 500 4MATIC
0.63 US qt (0.6 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Rear axle
E 320 / E 320 4MATIC
1.06 US qt (1 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
E 500 / E 500 4MATIC/
E 55 AMG
1.37 US qt (1.3 l)
E 320 4MATIC /
E 500 4MATIC
0.62 US qt (0.585 l)
Transfer case
406
MB Transfer Case Fluid
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Power steering
approx. 1.1 US qt (1 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs
approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each
High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system
1.1 US qt (1.05 l)
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
E 320 / E 320 4MATIC
10.7 US qt (10 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
E 500 / E 500 4MATIC
11.9 US qt (11.3 l)
E 55 AMG
13.8 US qt (13.2 l)
Cooling system
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
21.12 US gal (80.0 l)
2.38 US gal (9.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
407
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model
Capacity
Air conditioning system
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer
4.8 US qt (4.5 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning
system
7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 413).
408
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use
only engine oils recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on recommended brands is available in the Factory
Approved Service Products Pamphlet, or at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Always check the oil filler cap
(컄 page 287) for important information
pertaining to the engine oil needing to
meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is printed on the oil filler cap, only
use an engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that
meets the specification indicated on
the oil filler cap.
Using engine oils of other specification
may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Please follow FSS recommendations for
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so
could result in engine damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil is used in the air conditioning system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information.
409
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline
!
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
gasoline is not available and low octane
fuel is used, follow these precautions:
앫
Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible
앫
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration
앫
Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage
앫
410
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain
Fuel requirements
Gasoline additives
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
meeting ASTM standard D 439:
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) Octane Number and the Motor (M) Octane Number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
Do not blend any specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
costs and may be harmful to the engine operation.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
앫
Corrosion protection
앫
Freeze protection
앫
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used
year-round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Service Booklet for
replacement interval
Coolant system design and coolant used
stipulate the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the Service Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0
anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other
Mercedes-Benz approved products of
equal specification (see Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it
back up to the proper level.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45%
anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately - 22°F
(-30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze
protection to approximately - 49°F
(-45°C)], the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use
more than this amount of
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
411
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used
to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).
Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
such engines be specifically formulated to
protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use
such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
result in a significantly shortened service
life.)
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model
Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C)
– 49°F (– 45°C)
E 320/E 320 4MATIC
5.3 US qt (5.0 l)
5.9 US qt (5.5 l)
E 500 /E 500 4MATIC
6.0 US qt (5.65 l)
6.6 US qt (6.2 l)
E 55 AMG
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
7.7 US qt (7.3 l)
412
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
systems are supplied from the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approximately:
앫
7.4 US qt. (7 l) in vehicles with a headlamp cleaning system* or heated reservoir
앫
4.8 US qt. (4.5 l) in vehicles without a
headlamp cleaning system
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above “freezing point”,
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“S” and water:
앫
Warning
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You can be seriously burned.
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water].
For temperatures below “freezing point”
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“S” and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent / antifreeze:
앫
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].
413
Technical data
Consumer information
왔 Consumer information
The following text is published as required
of all manufacturers of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966”.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Tread wear Traction
Temperature
200
A
AA
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
414
Tread wear
Traction
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Technical data
Consumer information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning
G
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
415
416
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
ADS
(Adaptive Damping System)
Automatically adapts the optimum suspension damping to prevailing driving
conditions.
Airmatic DC
(Airmatic Dual Control)
Automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for your
vehicle. Airmatic consists of two components:
앫
Adaptive Damping System
앫
Vehicle level control
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
a light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service center which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a breakdown.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
COMAND
(Cockpit Management and Data System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and navigation system, as well as other optional
equipment (CD changer, telephone,
etc.).
417
Technical terms
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to adjust settings.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
Distronic*
A driving convenience cruise control
system which helps the driver maintain
a pre-selected speed:
앫
If there is no vehicle directly ahead,
the system operates in the same
way as conventional ->cruise control.
앫
If a slower moving vehicle is ahead,
Distronic will reduce your vehicle
speed to the extent permitted by reduced throttle and up to 20% braking power to maintain the preset
minimum following distance.
DTR
(->Distronic*)
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.
418
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
FSS PLUS
(Flexible Service System PLUS)
Service indicator in the multifunction
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
Technical terms
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs DVD digital maps for
navigation.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer
and fuel gauge.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and exterior mirror positions for each SmartKey.
419
Technical terms
Multifunction display
The display field in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system.
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
on the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, including:
앫
Engine
앫
Clutch/torque converter
앫
Transmission
앫
Transfer case*
앫
Drive shaft
앫
Axle shafts/axles
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard operation S and
operation C.
E 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift
control and manual shift program: in
addition to S and C (for sporty S or
comfortable C operation), you can use
M for manual shift program.
420
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics
Transmission of vehicle data and current location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for subscribers to the Tele Aid service.
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags and
child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Technical terms
SBC
(Sensotronic Brake Control)
Electronically controlled hydraulic
braking system for increased braking
safety and comfort.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission selector lever from being moved out of position P
without the ignition or engine on and
brake pedal depressed.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and air bags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Tele Aid System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Telematics*
A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics”.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
Tire speed rating
Part of a tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
Vehicle level control
The ground clearance of the vehicle is
automatically controlled according to a
selected setting and speed.The driver
can set the ground clearance manually
for example on very rough roads.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).
421
422
Index
A
ABS 80, 417
ABS control 81
Malfunction indicator lamp 312
Messages in display 322
Warning lamp 312
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 168
Accident
In case of 50
Activating
Air conditioning (cooling) 186, 198
Air recirculation mode 184, 195
Anti-theft alarm system 89
Automatic climate control 190
Central locking (control system) 154
Charcoal filter 196
Climate control 180
Defrosting 183
Distance warning function* 227
Distronic* 223
Easy-entry/exit feature* 155
ESP 85
Exterior headlamps 46
Exterior lamps 125
Front fog lamps 126
Hazard warning flasher 128
Headlamps 46
High beams 127
Ignition 31
Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* 33
Immobilizer 53, 89
Rear fog lamp 126, 127
Rear window defroster 177
Residual heat 186, 198
Seat heater* 119
Tow-away alarm 90
Windshield wipers 48
Adding
Engine oil 286
Additional turn signal 365
Adjustable air vents, rear passenger
compartment 199
Adjusting 34
Air distribution 182, 193
Air volume 182, 183, 194
Backrest tilt 35
Exterior rear view mirror 38
Head restraint height 36
Head restraint tilt 36
Instrument cluster illumination 131
Interior rear view mirror 37
Mirrors 37
Multicontour seat* 116
Seat cushion depth 117
Seat cushion tilt 35
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Seat height 35
Seats 34
Steering column height 37
Steering wheel 36
Adjusting steering column in or out 37
Adjusting steering column up or down 37
Adjusting the dynamic seat 157
423
Index
Air conditioning (cooling)
Turning off 186, 198
Turning on 186, 198
Air distribution
Adjusting 182, 193
Air pressure see Tire inflation
pressure 292
Air pump, electric 377
Air recirculation mode 184, 194
Activating 184, 195
Deactivating 185, 195
Air vents, rear passenger compartment
Adjustable 199
Air volume
Adjusting 182, 183, 194
Airbags 57
Children 58
Front 61
Passenger 61
Safety guidelines 60
Side impact 62
Window curtain 62
424
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)* 230
Alarm
Audible 79, 90
Canceling 90
Visual 89
Alarm system
Anti-theft 89
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 358,
374, 417
Antiglare
Automatic 172
Antilock brake system (ABS) 417
Anti-theft alarm system
Arming 89
Canceling alarm 90
Disarming 90
Anti-theft systems 89
Anti-theft alarm system 89
Immobilizer 89
Tow-away alarm 90
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 273
Ashtray 249
At the gas station 280
AUDIO menu 139
Selecting radio station 139
Selecting satellite radio* station
Audio system
CD mode 140
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 172
Automatic central locking
Activating/deactivating
(control system) 154
Automatic climate control
Temperature sensor 27
Automatic climate control* 188
Adjusting air distribution 193
Adjusting air volume 183, 194
Air recirculation mode 194
Defrosting 194
Rear window defroster 177
Residual heat utilization 198
Residual ventilation 198
Setting the temperature 192
140
Index
Automatic headlamp mode 125
Automatic lighting control
Activating 129
Deactivating 129
Automatic locking when driving 111
Automatic transmission 162
Accelerator position 168
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 171
Gear ranges 164
Gear selector lever position 165
Gear shifting malfunctions 171
Kickdown 168
Manual shift program mode
(SL 55 AMG Kompressor) 169
Manual shifting 163
One-touch gearshifting 163
Program mode selector switch 168
Selector lever position 162
Starting the engine 43
Winter program mode 168
B
Backrest
Folding forward 240
Folding rearward 241
BAS 82, 417
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 361, 362
Check lamp 96, 100
Checking 97, 102
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Changing 361, 362
Checking 97, 102
Batteries, vehicle
Charging 381
Disconnecting 380
Messages in display 323, 327, 328
Reconnecting 381
Removing 381
Service 379
Battery discharged
Jump starting 382
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 417
Block heater* 298
Blocking
Rear window operation 78
Brake assist system (BAS) 417
Brake fluid 281, 331
Brake pads
Message in display 329
Brakes
Warning lamp 314
Break-in period 268
Bulbs, replacing
Additional turn signals 365
Fog lamps 365
Front lamps 365, 367
High beam 365
High beam bulb
(Bi-Xenon* headlamps only) 368
High beam bulb
(Halogen headlamps only) 368
High mounted brake lamp 366
License plate lamps 366, 369
Low beam 365
Parking lamps 366, 368
Side marker lamps 365, 369
Standing lamps 366, 368
Tail lamp 366
Tail lamp assemblies 369
Turn signal lamp 365
425
Index
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 417
Calling up
Distronic* settings 141
Range (distance to empty) 159
Service indicator 300
CAN system 417
Cargo tie-down rings 244
CD player
Operating 140
Center console
Lower part 26
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp 319
Upper part 25
Centigrade
Setting temperature units 146
Central locking
Automatic 111
From inside 111
Switch 111
Switching on/off
(control system) 154
Unlocking from inside 111
426
Central locking switch 111
Changing
Batteries (SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*) 361, 362
Batteries (SmartKey) 361, 362
SmartKey setting 155
Vehicle level 232
Charcoal filter 196
Activating 196
Deactivating 197
Charging
Vehicle batteries 381
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
lamp 315
Checking
Coolant level 287
Oil level 281, 284
Tire inflation pressure 281
Vehicle lighting 281
Child safety 66
Airbags 58
Infant and child restraint systems 63,
67
LATCH child seat anchors 77
Child safety switch see Blocking of rear
window operation 78
Cigarette lighter 250
Cleaning
Headlamps 174, 306
Light alloy wheels 307
Parktronic* system sensor 307
side markers 306
tail lamps 306
turn signal lenses 306
Windshield 48
Wood trims 310
Climate control 178
Adjusting 182
Defrosting 183
Setting the temperature 182
Clock 149
Index
Closing
Glove box 245
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof 210
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof with
KEYLESS-GO* 213
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* with
KEYLESS-GO* 204
Roller sunblinds 209
Side windows 202
Side windows with
KEYLESS-GO* 204, 207
Sliding/pop-up roof* 205
Sliding/pop-up roof* with
KEYLESS-GO* 204, 207
Sliding/pop-up roof* with
SmartKey 206
Trunk
Vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 108,
109
Trunk lid 105
Windows 201
Windows with SmartKey 203
Closing the trunk lid 108, 109
Cockpit 20, 417
Cockpit management and data system
(COMAND) 417
Collapsible tire 402
Tire inflation pressure 376
COMAND 417
COMAND* see separate operating
instructions
Combination switch 127
High beam flasher 47
Turn signals 47
Windshield wipers 47
Consumer information 414
Control system 134, 418
AUDIO menu 139
Convenience submenu 155
Display digital speedometer 139
Distronic* menu 141
Functions 138
Instrument cluster submenu 146,
148
Lighting submenu 151
Malfunction memory menu 142
Menus 137, 138
Multifunction display 134
Multifunction steering wheel 135
Selecting radio system 139
Selecting satellite radio* system 140
Settings menu 143
Standard display menu 139
Submenus 136, 138
TEL* menu 159
Trip computer menu 158
Vehicle submenu 154
Convenience submenu 155
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature* 155
Adjusting dynamic seat* 157
Setting parking position for exterior
rear view mirror 157
Setting SmartKey-dependency 156
Coolant
Checking level 287
Messages in display 332, 333, 334
Temperature gauge 132
Warning lamp 316
Coolant temperature 279
427
Index
Cruise control 215, 418
Canceling 216
Driving downhill 216
Driving uphill 216
Fine adjustment 217
Lever 222
Saving current speed 216
Setting speeds 217
Cruise control lever 215
Cup holder in the center console 246
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 417
D
Daytime running lamp mode 126
Setting 151
Deactivating
Air conditioning 186
Air recirculation mode 185, 195
Alarm 90
Anti-theft alarm system 90
Automatic climate control 185, 190
Central locking (control system) 154
428
Climate control 180
Cruise control 216
Defrost 183, 194
Distance warning function* 227
Distronic* 225
Engine with KEYLESS-GO* 53
ESP 84
Exterior lamps 125
Hazard warning flasher 128
Headlamps 52
Immobilizer 89
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off 154
Rear window defroster 177
Residual heat 187
Seat heater* 118
Seat ventilation* 119
SmartKey
Turning off the engine 53
Tow-away alarm 91
Deceleration
With Distronic* 221
Defogging
Windshield 183, 193
Defrosting 183, 194
Delayed switch-off
Interior lighting 154
Dialing
A number (telephone) 160
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while
driving 49
With starting 44
Digital speedometer 139
Direction of rotation 292
Discharged battery
Jump starting 382
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 380
Display
Selecting 147, 148
Index
Displays
Digital speedometer 139
Distronic* 220
Messages 285
Selecting 147
Service indicator 299
Showing malfunctions 142
Distance
Decreasing in Distronic* 226
Increasing in Distronic* 226
Warning function 226
Distance to empty (range)
Calling up 158
Distance warning function* 226
Activating 227
Deactivating 227
DTR* warning lamp 226
Intermittent warning sound 226
Symbol in multifunction display 141
Distronic* 218, 418
Activated 222
Activating 223
Calling up settings 141, 221
Cleaning system sensor 307
Cruise control lever 222
Deactivated 222
Deactivating 225
Deceleration 221
Decreasing distance 226
Displays in the speedometer dial 220
Distance warning function 226
Driving hints 227
Increasing distance 226
Intermittent signal tone 220
Menu 221
Messages in display 323
Sensor cover 307
Setting a higher speed 223
Setting a slower speed 224
Setting the current speed 223
Setting the following distance in
Distronic 225
Warning and indicator lamps 220
Door control panel 28
Door entry lamps 130
Door handle 28
Door unlock
With Tele Aid* 260
Doors
Message in display 335
Opening from inside vehicle 103
Opening from outside 100
Downhill driving
Cruise control 216
Downshifting 163
Drive-Dynamic seat* 117
Driving
General instructions 40
Hydroplaning 273
In winter 275
Problems 49
Safety systems 80
With Distronic* 227
429
Index
Driving hints
SBC brake system 87
Driving instructions 269
Driving off 272
Driving safety systems
4MATIC 88
ABS 80
BAS 82
ESP 82, 418
SBC brake system 85
Driving systems 215
Airmatic DC* 230
Cruise control 215
Distronic* 218
Driving safety systems 80
Vehicle level control 231
DTR see Distronic* 418
Dual control*
Airmatic DC* 230
430
E
Easy-entry/exit
Message in display 330
Easy-entry/exit feature* 113
Activating 155
Interrupting movement 113, 156
Electric air pump 376
Electrical fuses 389
Electrical system 403
Electronic Stability Program see ESP 82,
418
Emergency call system* 253
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 256
With Tele Aid* 255
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 171
Emergency operations
Opening/closing Sliding/pop-up roof*
or panorama sliding/pop-up
roof* 364
Releasing trunk lid from inside 110
Remote door unlock 260
Unlocking the trunk lid 360
Unlocking the vehicle 359
Emergency tensioning device see
ETD 66, 418
Emission control 278
Ending
A call (telephone) 160
Engine 396
Compartment 283
Message in the display 315
Starting 43
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 44
Starting with the SmartKey 43
Turning off with the key 53
Engine compartment
Hood 283
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 315
Engine number 418
Index
Engine oil
Adding 286
Additives 409
Checking level 284
Consumption 284
Display messages 336
Filler neck 287
Messages in display 285
Viscosity 418
ESP 82, 418
Four wheel electronic traction system
with ESP 88
Switching off 84
Switching on 85
Synchronizing 325
Warning lamp 313
ETD 418
Safety guidelines 60
Exterior lamp switch 124
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 38
Parking position for 157
F
Fahrenheit
Setting temperature units 146
Fastening the seat belts 40
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 217
First aid kit 356
Flat tire 372
Collapsible tire 376
Mounting the spare wheel 372, 375
Spare wheel 372
Flexible Service System (FSS) 299, 418
Fog lamp, rear 127
Fog lamps, front 126
Messages in display 340
Replacing bulbs 365
Switching on 126, 127
Following distance in Distronic* 225
Four wheel electronic traction system
(4MATIC) with ESP 88
4MATIC 88
Front airbags 61
Front lamps 365
Messages in display 341
Replacing bulbs 367
Switching on 124
Front seat head restraints
Power seat 114
Removing and installing 114
Front seats
Heater* 118
FSS (Flexible Service System) 299, 418
Fuel 281
Fuel tank reserve warning lamp 317
Premium unleaded gasoline 281
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 158
Since last reset 158
Fuel filler flap 280
Locking 280
Unlocking 280
Fuel reserve tank
Message in display 338
431
Index
Fuel tank
Filler flap 280
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 406
Fully closing (Express-close) the sliding/pop-up roof 206
Fully opening (Express-open) the
sliding/pop-up roof 206
Functions (control system) 138
Resetting 144
Fuse chart 389
Fuses 389
Fuse chart 389
Fuse extractor 389
Spare fuses 389
G
Garage door opener 27, 261
Erasing the integrated remote
control 265
Integrated remote control 262
Rolling code programming 264
432
Gasoline see Fuel 281
Gear range 419
Automatic transmission 164
Limiting 164
Shifting into optimal 163
Gear range limit
Canceling 163
Gear selector lever
Position 165
Global
Locking 95
Locking with KEYLESS-GO* 100
Unlocking 95
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 100
Global Positioning System (GPS) 419
Glove box 245
Closing 245
Opening 245
Good visibility 172
GPS 419
GPS see COMAND 254
H
Hand-held transmitter
Programming integrated remote
control 262
Reprogramming integrated remote
control 265
Hazard warning flasher 128
Switching off 128
Switching on 128
Headlamps
Automatic control 125
Bi-Xenon* 417
Cleaning system* 174
Switching off 52
Switching on 46
Heated seats* 118
Heated steering wheel* 251
Height adjustment
Head restraints 36
Steering wheel 36
Vehicle level 231
Index
High beam flasher 47, 128
High beam headlamps
Messages in display 341
Replacing bulbs 365
Switching on 127
Hood 283
Closing 283
Message in display 338
Opening 283
Hydroplaning 273
I
Identification labels 394
Ignition 31, 33
Switching on 43, 44
Immobilizer 89
Activating 89
Deactivating 89
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Infant and child restraint systems 67
Installing 75
LATCH child seat anchors 77
Information
About service and warranty 10
Button for Tele Aid* 258
Inside rear view mirror
Antiglare 172
Installing
Infant and child restraint systems 75
Towing eye bolt 388
Wiper blades 371
Instrument cluster 22, 131, 309, 419
Coolant temperature gauge 132
Illumination 131
Multifunction display 134
Outside temperature indicator 133
Selecting language 147
Instrument lighting 131, 132
Integrated remote control
Canadian programming 264
Erasing memory 265
Gate operator 264
Hand-held transmitter 262
Operation 265
Rolling code programming 264
Interior lighting 128
Activating automatic control 129
Deactivating automatic control 129
Delayed switch-off 154
Manual operation 129
Interior rear view mirror
Adjusting 37
J
Jack 356
Jump starting
382
433
Index
K
Key, Mechanical 359
Key, SmartKey
Changing the batteries 361, 362
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Changing the batteries 361, 362
KEYLESS-GO*
Activating ignition with 33
Closing
Trunk 108, 109
Closing panorama sliding/pop-up
roof* 204, 207
Closing side windows 204, 207
Closing sliding/pop-up roof* 204,
207
Factory setting 100
Global locking 100
Global unlocking 100
Important notes 98
Locking the vehicle 102
Remote controls 97
Starting the engine 44
Turning off engine 53
434
Unlocking and opening, trunk lid 101
Unlocking with 32
Kickdown 168, 419
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 146
Km/h or mph in speedometer 146
L
Lamp bulbs, exterior 365
Lamps, exterior
Front 365
Light sensor 341
Messages in display 341
Replacing bulbs for rear 366, 369
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 312
Airbag Off 62
Battery (SmartKey) 95, 100
Brakes 314
CHECK ENGINE 315
Coolant 316
DTR* 220
Engine diagnostics 315
ESP 313
Fuel reserve 315
SBC 85
Seat belts 315, 317
Service indicator 299
SRS 57
Language
Multifunction display 147
Setting 147
LATCH child seat anchors 77
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 395
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 310
Level control system*
Airmatic DC* 230
Lever
For cruise control 222
License plate lamps 366
Messages in display 341
Replacing bulbs 369
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 309
Light sensor 341
Lighter see Cigarette lighter 250
Index
Lighting 124
Automatic headlamp mode 125
Combination switch 127
Daytime running lamp mode 126
Door entry lamps 130
Exterior lamp switch 124
Front fog lamps 126, 127
High beams 127
Instrument cluster illumination 131
Instruments 131, 132
Interior 128
Locator lighting 126
Low beam 124
Manual headlamp mode 125
Night security illumination 126
Parking lamps 124
Rear fog lamp 127
Settings (control system) 151
Trunk lamp 130
Limiting the gear range 164
Limp Home Mode 171
Loading 237
Cargo tie-down rings 244
Instructions 243
Roof rack* 237
Ski sack* 237
Split rear bench seat* 240
Locator lighting 126
Setting 152
Lock button 419
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 54
Locking 51, 94
Automatic while driving 111
Centrally from inside 111
Fuel filler flap 280
Global with KEYLESS-GO* 100
Global, SmartKey 95
Vehicle in an emergency 360
Vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 102
Loss of SmartKeys 97, 102
Low beam headlamps
Messages in display 341
Replacing bulbs 365
Lowering
Vehicle 378
M
Main Dimensions 404
Maintenance 12
Malfunction
Displaying 142
Malfunction memory 142
Calling up 142
Clearing 143
MANUAL
Shift program mode
(SL 55 AMG Kompressor) 169
Manual headlamp mode 125
Manual operations
Fuel filler flap 363
Interior lighting control 129
Sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
sliding/pop-up roof* 364
Unlocking the driver’s door 359
Unlocking the transmission lever 363
Unlocking the trunk lid 360
Massage function 118
MAXCOOL maximum cooling 194
Mechanical key 359
435
Index
Memory function 121, 419
Recalling positions from
memory 122
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking positions 123
Storing SmartKey dependent
settings 122
Menus 137
AUDIO 139
Distronic* 141, 221
In control system 137, 138
Malfunction memory 142
Settings menu 143
Standard display 139
Submenus 136
TEL* 159
Trip computer 158
Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Setting 146
Mirrors
Adjusting 37
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 172
436
Automatic antiglare* for inside
mirror 172
Exterior rear view mirror 38
Exterior rear view mirror parking
positions 157, 173
Interior rear view mirror 37
Storing exterior mirror parking
position 123
MON 281
MON (Motor Octane Number) 419
Mph or km/h in speedometer 146
Multicontour seat* 116
Multifunction display 134, 420
Selecting language 147
Standard display 138
Multifunction display messages
ABS 322
Batteries 323, 327, 328
Brake fluid 331
Brake pads 329
Check engine 315
Coolant 333, 334
Coolant level 332
Distronic* 323
Doors 335
Easy-entry/exit feature 330
Fuel reserve tank 338
Hood 338
Lamps 341
Parking brake 330
SBC brake system 329, 330
SmartKey 339
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 338
Tele Aid 348, 349
Telephone* 354
Tires 345
Trunk 354
Washer fluid 354
Multifunction steering wheel 24, 135,
420
Buttons 135
Index
N
Navigation system
See separate COMAND operating
instructions 141
Night security illumination 126
O
Occupant Classification System 70
Self-test 74
Occupant safety 56
Airbags 57
Children and airbags 58
Children in the vehicle 66
Fastening the seat belt 40
Infant and child restraint systems
LATCH child seat anchors 77
Seat belts 40, 60
Oil
Adding 286
Checking level 285
Consumption 284
Filler neck 286
Viscosity 418
Oil level
Checking 285
67
One-touch gearshifting 163
Canceling gear range limit 163
Downshifting 163
Upshifting 163
Opening 364
Ashtray 249
Doors from the inside 103
Fuel filler flap 280
Fuel filler flap manually 363
Glove box 245
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof 210
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* in an
emergency 364
Roller sunblinds 209
Side windows 202
Sliding/pop-up roof* 205
Sliding/pop-up roof* in an
emergency 364
Sliding/pop-up roof* with
SmartKey 206
Trunk 103
Trunk from the inside 104
Trunk lid with SmartKey 96
Windows 201
Windows with SmartKey 203
Opening and closing
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof with
SmartKey 212
Opening from the inside
Trunk 105
Opening the trunk from the outside 103
Operating
CD player 140
Radio 139
Safety 16
Telephone* 159
Vehicle outside the USA and
Canada 13
Operating safety 16
Operation
Garage door opener 265
Integrated remote control 265
Operator’s Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 306
Outside temperature indicator 133
Overdue service 299
Overhead control panel 27
Garage door opener 261
Overspeed range 420
437
Index
P
Paintwork 305
Panic alarm 79
Panic button on SmartKey 79
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing with
SmartKey 212
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* 209
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell 245
Parking 51
Parking brake 45, 51
Engaging 51
Message in display 330
Releasing 45
Parking lamps 365
Replacing the bulbs 368
Switching on 124
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors 123, 157,
173
438
Parktronic*
Malfunctioning 236
Sensor 307
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 319
Passenger compartment
Fuse box 389
Interior lighting 128
Interior rear view mirror 37
Passenger safety see Occupant
safety 56
Pedals 269
Phone book*
Loading 160
Quick search 161
Phone number*
Dialing 160
Redialing 161
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 310
Pliers, universal (vehicle tool kit) 358
Poly-V-belt drive 420
Positions (Memory function)
Recalling from memory 122
Positions (Memory function*)
Storing into memory 122
Power assistance 270
Power seat
Adjusting backrest tilt 35
Adjusting head restraint height 36
Adjusting head restraint tilt 36
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 35
Adjusting seat height 35
Memory function 121
Removing/installing head
restraints 114
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Power train 420
Power washer 305
Power windows 201
Blocking of rear window operation 78
Side windows 201
Synchronizing 204
Index
Practical hints
First aid kit 356
Jump starting 382
Lamp in center console 319
Lamps in instrument cluster 312
Messages in the display 321
Spare wheel 356
Vehicle tool kit 358
Problems
While driving 49
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Program mode selector switch 420
Automatic transmission 168
PULSE function (Massage function) 118
Q
Quick search
Phone book*
161
R
Radio
Selecting stations 139
Selecting stations (satellite*)
Radio transmitters, control and
operation 277
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 159
Rear bench seat
Foldable 240
Rear fog lamp
Bulb 365
Switching on 127
Rear lamp bulbs 366
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear passenger compartment
Adjustable air vents 199
Rear seat head restraints
Installing 116
Removing 116
140
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 172
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors 172
Rear window
Blocking operation 78
Rear window defroster 177
Activating 177
Deactivating 177
Rear window sunshade* 176
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 381
Refueling 280
Regular checks 281
Reinstalling the battery 381
Remote controls
Integrated 262
SmartKey 94, 98
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 97
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid* 260
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 420
439
Index
Removing
Ski sack 240
Vehicle battery 381
Wheel 374
Wiper blades 371
Removing and installing
Front seat head restraints 114
Replacing
Bulbs 365
Front lamp bulbs 367
Front turn signal lamp bulb 368
Fuses 389
License plate lamp bulbs 369
Parking and standing lamp bulb 368
Rear lamp bulbs 366, 369
Side marker lamp bulb 369
Wiper blades 370
Reporting
Safety defects 18
Reprogramming
integrated remote control 265
Reset button in the instrument
cluster 143
440
Resetting
All functions (control system) 143
All functions of a submenu 144
Fuel consumption 158
Service indicator (FSS) 300, 302,
303
Trip odometer 132
Residual heat utilization 186, 198
Residual ventilation 186, 198
REST (Residual engine heat
utilization) 198
Restraint system see Infant and child
restraint systems 67
Rims and Tires 398
Roadside Assistance
Tele Aid* 253
Roadside assistance 12
Rolling code programming 264
RON 281
RON (Research Octane Number) 420
Roof rack* 237
Rotating wheels 295
Rubber parts
Cleaning 310
S
Safety
Occupant 56
Safety belts see Seat belts 40
Safety defects
Reporting 18
Safety systems
Driving 80
Saving current speed 216
SBC 85
SBC brake system 421
Activation 86
Deactivation 87
Driving hints 87
Messages in display 329, 330
Self-check 87
Warning lamp 85
Seat belt force limiter 66
Seat belts 63
Cleaning 309
Fastening 40
Proper use of 42, 64
Safety guidelines 60
Warning lamp 317
Index
Seat cushion depth
Adjusting 117
Seat heater*
Switching off 119
Switching on 119
Seat ventilation*
Switching off 119
Switching on 119
Seats 113
Adjusting 34
Easy entry/exit feature* 113
Heater* 118
Multicontour seat* 116
Split rear bench seat* 240
Ventilation 119
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings 244
Selecting display 147, 148
Selector lever
Lock 43
Message in the display 326
Position (automatic
transmission) 162
Self-test
Occupant Classification System 74
Tele Aid* 254
Service
Batteries 379
Calling up the service indicator 300
Major service (Service H) 299
Minor service (Service A) 299
Overdue 300
Types 299
When due 299
Service and warranty information 10
Service indicator 299
Calling up 300
Clearing 300
Service life (tires) 292
Service System see FSS 299
Setting
Convenience functions 145, 155
Cruise control 216
Daytime running lamp mode 151
Distronic* time interval 225
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position 123
Higher speed in cruise control 217
Higher speed in Distronic* 223
Hours (clock) 149
Individual vehicle settings 143
Instrument lighting 131, 132
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off 154
Lamps and lighting
(control system) 151
Language, multifunction display 147
Locator lighting 152
Lower speed in cruise control 217
Lower speed in Distronic* 224
441
Index
Miles/kilometers in
speedometer 146
Minutes (clock) 149, 150
Parking position for exterior rear view
mirrors 157
Slower speed in cruise control 217
Slower speed in Distronic* 224
SmartKey dependent memory 156
Speed in cruise control 217
Speed in Distronic* 223
Speedometer display mode 146
Suspension tuning 230
Synchronizing the time 149
Temperature (interior) 182, 192
Temperature indicator 146
Tire inflation pressure 148
Units
Speedometer 146
Temperature 146
Tire inflation pressure 148
Vehicle level control 231
442
Settings
Calling up Distronic* 141, 221
Convenience functions 155
Factory, KEYLESS-GO* 100
Factory, SmartKey 95
Individual 156
Lighting (control system) 151
Menus and submenus 136
Resetting all (control system) 143
Resetting in the submenu 144
Selective 95, 100
Settings menu
Functions in 143
Individual vehicle settings 143
Submenus 144
Shift lock 421
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 165
Into optimal gear range
(automatic transmission) 163
Side impact airbags 62
Side marker lamps 365, 369
Side windows
Automatic opening 202
Cleaning 308
Closing 201, 202, 203
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 204, 207
Closing with SmartKey 203
Opening 201, 203
Opening fully (Express-open) 202
Opening with SmartKey 203
Stopping 202
Synchronizing power windows 204
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Windshield wipers 48
Single wipe 48
Ski sack* 237
Removing 240
Unfolding and loading 237
Unloading and folding 239
SL 55 AMG Kompressor
MANUAL shift program mode 169
Index
Sliding/pop-up roof* 205
Closing 205
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 204, 207
Closing with SmartKey 206
Opening 205
Opening with SmartKey 206
Stopping 206
Synchronizing 208
Sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Emergency operations 364
SmartKey 94
Battery check lamp 95, 100
Checking the batteries 97, 102
Factory setting 95
Global locking 95
Global locking and unlocking 95
Global unlocking 95
Locking and unlocking 94
Loss of 97
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up roof* with 206
Opening and closing windows
with 203
Opening the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof* with SmartKey 212
positions in starter switch 31
Remote controls 94, 98
Restoring to factory setting 96, 100
Selective setting 95, 100
Starting the engine 43
Unlocking with 30
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 97
Global locking and unlocking 100
Locking the vehicle 102
Loss of 102
Messages in display 338
Remote controls 97
Turning off the engine 53
Unlocking with 32
SmartKey-dependency memory
Settings 156
Snow chains 298
Solar panel* 214
Spare fuses 389
Spare parts service 392
Spare wheel 356
Speed
Saving current 216
Speed settings
Cruise control 217
Distronic* 223, 224
Speedometer
Displays 220
Settings units 146
Speedometer display mode
Selecting 146
Split rear bench seat* 240
Sporty driving style 230
SRS 421
SRS indicator lamp 23, 318
Standing lamps 124
Replacing bulbs 368
Standing water 276
Starter switch 31
Positions 31
443
Index
Starting difficulties 44
Starting position 31
Starting the engine 43
Steering column
Height adjustment 37
Length adjustment 37
Steering wheel
Adjusting 36
Cleaning 310
Electrical adjustment 37
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 261
Stopping
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof
Sliding/pop-up roof* 206
Windows 202
Storage compartment under
armrest 247
Storage compartments 245
Glove box 245
Storing (Memory function*)
Positions into memory 122
444
211
Submenus
Convenience 155
For settings 136
In control system 138
Instrument cluster 146, 148
Lighting 151
Resetting functions in Control
system 144
Selecting 144
Settings menu 144
Vehicle 154
Sun visors 174
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) 421
Suspension tuning
For comfortable driving style 230
For sporty driving style 230
Switching off
Automatic central locking
(control system) 154
Engine 52
ESP 84
Hazard warning flasher 128
Headlamps 52
Seat heating* 119
Switching on
Automatic central locking
(control system) 154
ESP 85
Front fog lamps 126, 127
Hazard warning flasher 128
Headlamps 46
High beams 127
Parking lamps 124
Rear fog lamp 127
Seat heating* 119
Windshield wipers 47
Symbol (Distronic*)
Distance warning function* 141
Synchronizing
ESP 325
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* 213
Power windows 204
Sliding/pop-up roof* 208
Time 149
Index
T
Tachometer 133
Displaying gear range 164
Overspeed range 133
Tail lamps 366, 369
Tar stains 305
Tele Aid
Messages in display 348, 349
Tele Aid System 421
Tele Aid* 253
Emergency calls 255
Information 258
Initiating an emergency call
manually 256
Remote door unlock 260
Roadside Assistance 257
SOS button 256
Stolen vehicle tracking services 261
System self-check 254
Tele Aid System 253
Upgrade signals 259
Telematics* 421
Telephone* 24, 252
Answering a call 160
Dialing a number from the phone
book 160
Ending a call 160
Loading phone book* 160
Messages in the display 354
Operating 159
Redialing 161
Temperature
Display mode 146
Sensor 27
Setting interior temperature 182,
192
Setting units in display 146
Tires 293
The coolant level is correct if the
level 288
Tie-down rings (trunk) 244
Tightening torque 378, 421
Time
Setting hours 149
Setting minutes 149, 150
Tire inflation pressure
Setting units 148
Tire speed rating 421
Tire traction 274
Tires 414
Driving instructions 272
Messages in display 345
Messages in the display 343, 344
Retreads 291
Service life 292
Temperature 293
Tread depth 297
Wear pattern 295
Winter 297
Tires and wheels
Tire inflation pressure 292
445
Index
Tools 358
Tow-away alarm 90
Arming 90
Disarming 90
Disarming for transport 90
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit)
Installing 388
Towing the vehicle 385
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 261
Traction 168, 421
Transmission fluid level 287
Tread depth (tires 297
Trip computer 158
Trip odometer
Resetting 132
Trunk
Closing the lid 105
Lamp 130
Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 102
446
Message in display 354
Opening 103
Opening from inside vehicle 104
Opening from the inside 105
Tie-down rings 244
Trunk lid 105
Trunk lid emergency release 110
Unlocking and opening with
KEYLESS-GO* 101
Unlocking and opening with
SmartKey 96
Unlocking in an emergency 360
Trunk lid
Closing 105
Turn signals 47
Additional in mirrors 365
Front bulbs 365
Turning off
Engine 52
U
Units
Setting speedometer units 146
Setting temperature units 146
Setting tire inflation pressure
units 148
Unlocking 30, 94, 359
Centrally from inside 111
Driver’s door in an emergency 359
Fuel filler flap 280
Global 95
Global with KEYLESS-GO* 100
Selective settings 95, 100
Trunk in an emergency 360
Trunk lid with KEYLESS-GO* 101
Trunk lid with SmartKey 96
Vehicle in an emergency 260
With KEYLESS-GO* 32
With the SmartKey 30
Index
Upgrade signals
Tele Aid* 259
Uphill driving
Cruise control 216
Upshifting 163
Useful features 245
Ashtrays 249
Cigarette lighter 250
Garage door opener 261
Heated steering wheel* 251
Tele Aid* 253
Telephone* 252
V
Vehicle
Individual settings 143, 145
Locking in an emergency 360
Lowering 378
Towing 385
Unlocking in an emergency 359
Vehicle care
Cup holder 309
Distronic* system sensor cover 307
Engine cleaning 306
Gear selector lever 309
Hard plastic trim items 309
Leather upholstery 310
Light alloy wheels 309
Ornamental moldings 306
Paintwork 305
Parktronic* system sensor 307
Plastic and rubber parts 310
Power washer 305
Seat belts 309
Steering wheel 309
Tar stains 305
Vehicle washing 306
Window cleaning 308
Wood trims 310
Vehicle level
Changing 232
Setting 232
Automatic 232
Manual 232
Vehicle level control system*
Airmatic DC* 230
Vehicle tool kit 358
Alignment bolt 358
Fuse extractor 358
Hex-socket wrench 358
Open-end wrench 358
Screwdriver 358
Spare fuses 358
Towing eye bolt 358
Universal pliers 358
Wheel wrench 358
Vehicle washing 306
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)
Voice control system* 421
421
447
Index
W
Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function* 226
Distronic* 220
Drivers seat belts 63
Parking brake 46
Warranty coverage 393
Washing the vehicle 304
Wear pattern (tires) 295
Weights 405
Wheel change 372
Tightening torque 378
Wheels
Rotating 295
Tires and wheels 291
Window curtain airbags 62
Windows see Side windows 201
448
Windshield
Defogging 183, 193
Refilling washer fluid 289
Replacing wiper blades 371
Washer fluid 289
Windshield washer fluid
Message in display 354
Refilling 289
Wiping with 48
Windshield wipers 47, 173
Fast wiper speed 48
Intermittent wiping 48
Replacing wiper blades 370, 371
Single wipe 48
Switching on 47
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 48
Winter driving
Block heater* 298
Snow chains 298
Tires 297
Transmission program mode 168
Winter tires 297
Winter driving instructions 275
Winter tires 297
Wiper blades 307
Installing 371
Removing 371
Replacing 371
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 48
Interval 48
With windshield washer fluid 48
Wood trims
Cleaning 310
X
Xenon headlamps*
Bi-Xenon* 417
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider
this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
G
Warning
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2282-31
Press time 12/02/03
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany
Order No. 6515 1109 13 Part No. 211 584 47 83 USA Edition B 2004